JP7117752B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of executing a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to give a feeling of excitement by using a display effect.

JP 2016-29956 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of holds,
The gaming machine selects one game state from a plurality of game states including an advantageous game state that is relatively advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player,
The display means is capable of displaying a pending icon representing the pending stored in the pending storage means and a variation icon different from the pending icon and corresponding to the variation,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects ,
The first display effect is an effect indicating whether or not there is a big win in the pending state corresponding to the pending icon instead of the change, and it is determined once that there is no big win in the pending state corresponding to the pending icon. It is a production that performs the first suggestive display that is collectively suggested by the display,
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and is different from the effect indicating whether or not there is a big win in the hold corresponding to the hold icon, and is not the change. It is a production that performs a second suggestive display that collectively suggests that there is a jackpot in the hold corresponding to the hold icon in one display,
The first display effect and the second display effect are the same variation, a specific variation that does not result in a big win, and the game state is changed from the advantageous game state to the unfavorable game state. Performed when there is a jackpot in the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the last variation of the advantageous gaming state ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary goods processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 6 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first mode of a first movable accessory; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a combined performance of the first and second movable accessories; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon hard-to-recognize effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon hard-to-visually recognize effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon hard-to-visually recognize effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation A corresponding to suspension|holding. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation B corresponding to suspension|holding. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation C corresponding to suspension|holding. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending jumpover effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending jumpover effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending jumpover effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern display effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol display effect B; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design display production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a winning type suggestive image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a winning type suggestive image display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a win type suggesting image display effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the two reach production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the two reach production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the two reach production|presentation C. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol variation production A. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol variation production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special design variation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a suggestive effect A other than failure; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a non-losing suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a non-losing suggestion effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special pseudo-continuous effect A. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a special pseudo-continuous effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a special pseudo-continuous effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a normal pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo-continue suggestive image usage effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining pseudo-continue suggestive image usage effect B; It is a figure for demonstrating the full rotation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the full rotation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the full rotation production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown fluctuation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown fluctuation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation section image superimposition effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image superimposition effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation section image superimposition effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a holding series suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a holding consecutive suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a holding series suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining area display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining area display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an area display effect C; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the time saving mode production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the time saving mode production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating normal mode production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a non-reserved rendition effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect with a holding run. It is a figure for clarifying resurrection production. It is a figure for demonstrating the right hitting reservation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the right hitting reservation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the right hitting reservation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an indication image effect A; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an indication image effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an indication image effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a V winning remaining time notification effect A; It is a diagram for explaining a V winning remaining time notification effect B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a V winning remaining time notification effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot design display production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot design display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol display effect|action C. FIG.

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Also, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on the player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a frame movable body 600 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects executed as the game progresses. be. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effects during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 . The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a retracted state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it protrudes upward from the front frame 53 .

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize winning device (second attacker) 36, a normal prize winning port 27, an out port 16, and displays. 40 and .

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper part of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 .

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a pending digested image display region in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called first pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called a second pending icon 9C. The first pending icon and the second pending icon are collectively referred to simply as pending icons.

The first performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result.

The second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 9L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 9C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 9R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R is synchronized with the variable display of the first and second special symbols which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are formed smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols is to be stop-displayed according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effects of displaying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R or the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are also referred to as "variable effects of decorative patterns", "variable effects of decorative patterns", or simply "variable effects". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special symbols start to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the suspended digested image 9C, the first special figure pending or the second special figure pending It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that is digested ("digestion of special figure reservation" described later).

On both left and right sides of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 includes a transparent left plate member 14L and a transparent right plate member 14R. The left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are movable left and right, respectively, and transition between a closed state that covers the entire image display device 7 and an open state that does not cover the central portion of the image display device 7, as will be described later. configured as possible.

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A movable board body 15 (also referred to as a board movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10.例文帳に追加A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which game balls flow in and an exit part from which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 that it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big hit is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying a performance pattern is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special pattern, and the pattern matching game informs the player of the lottery result of the big win more effectively.

In addition, the ``lottery of normal symbols'' means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big winning hole 30 has an opening/closing member (first special winning hole opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

A second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above and to the right of the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3 , and a second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 . It has The second big prize winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or permits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . It should be noted that the number of normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of the operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern display device 44 displays the number of memory of the normal pattern display device 42 operation reservation (normal pattern reservation). The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 as a trigger. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (changes display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on the winning of the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is performed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize winning port 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see 1, 2 from the left like "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. In the case of a failure, a failure pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not in a stop display (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is digested when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern in a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not in a stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as the normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map holds by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map holds.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the game machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the V area. Sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The electric tooth solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tooth 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the production as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . etc. is output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The lamp control board 107 is connected with the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15, and controls them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on both left and right sides of the image display device 7 . The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 . The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of each of the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15, and controls the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15 according to the motion pattern data. 2 Control the operation of the movable accessory 15 . Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and data relating to the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

An effect button detection switch 63 a and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108 . The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (Fig. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the motion of the frame movable body 600 according to the motion pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed down, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when a human body touches it, and the like. may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later), and includes a pre-determining command, a pending ball number command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores random number groups (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above areas, a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable bodies 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and variable production start commands, pre-variation end commands, fluctuation production end commands, opening production start commands, round production start commands, ending production start commands, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used in a lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot type determination) for the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect pattern variation effect indicating the result when the big hit judgment is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains, and it depends on which design the variably displayed production pattern is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. The “fluctuation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passage through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the "read-ahead effect random number" and the "chance-up random number" at the timing described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random number is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special figure stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127), the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It is shown that the stop pattern of special figure 2 (special figure stop design) is determined to be "jackpot design 1". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6, game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the acquired variation pattern random number (0 to 127), is a table referred to for determining the variation pattern. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, and it is determined as "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Also, when reach is achieved, it is also determined whether the reach is normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) with different fluctuation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3>SP2>SP1. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1-3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the power tube 22 is opened three times with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to select the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H” or “15H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, the open pattern is “open Pattern 23” is determined. FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) once for 0.1 seconds at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 second (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H" or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" at "15H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “big wins” and “losses” as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol (the jackpot type) that is stopped and displayed. ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly classified into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, the special figure stop symbol data 11H to 14H, 21H jackpots correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates the Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage scheduled jackpot" includes "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is only opened for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short in 14R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). That is, the game state after "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is, when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, a high probability short time state (high probability high base state ), but with a high probability, it becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special pattern 2) are all V-passing schedule jackpots. That is, when a jackpot is won by a lottery based on winning a prize to the second starting port 21 that can enter the ball by executing the electric sapo control described later, it will always be a V passage scheduled jackpot. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state", and the state in which the probability variation is not controlled is simply "normal probability state ( non-high-probability state, low-probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is called a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed, the special symbols are variable. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning of the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of openings on the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls won to the number of balls fired, is high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". Also, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) is referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific game state".

In a high base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start port 21 than to win the first start port 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a reserved ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol reserved ball number is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of whether or not a big hit is made by using a big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and a big hit random number value. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the variation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 ”, and the variation pattern “P68”, which is selected when the number of held balls is “3 to 4”. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164 ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when the value is other than that, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for prior determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and after that, the reservation is digested in this step S504, and the number of reserved balls of the normal design immediately becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, when the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6 pieces), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3" and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special design determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes big hit determination processing (step S1402) and variation pattern selection processing (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side where it is read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, if the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of a predetermined standby time, and sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 jackpot determination process (step S1408) are the same in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high probability state table of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big hit is determined (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

When the result of the big hit determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1506) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Variation pattern selection processing of special figure 2 (step S1403) and variation pattern selection processing of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

When the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

When the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, one of the variation patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are being selected more often. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In Toku-zu 1, the variation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current Tok-zu 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as variation patterns, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P32" or "P33". Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is the above-described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). When the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set to the time saving counter if it is a low probability high base state, and "160" is set to the time saving counter if it is a high probability high base state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, , the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the large winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the large winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not established (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to fraud. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time is that, in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", the long opening is performed when the second ball wins (maximum 31.5 seconds here). ) is executed. In addition, here, the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), so generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening and closing member 71 is relatively long, so at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closure of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this process.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after this big hit game becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "160" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "160" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either the condition that the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner 160 times or the winning of the next jackpot is established.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of number of pending balls]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1 to it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number value may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the variation effect (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reservation ball number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information about the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, the result of prior determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0-55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and when the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes the game state information indicating the current game state, the pattern information indicating the pattern as the determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, refers to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93, and determines a chance-up performance pattern.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the part which decides the fluctuation production pattern of special figure 1 at the time of non time saving state among chance up production pattern decision table T53 is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop pattern pattern determination table T54, and the combination of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. When the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command, , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-fluctuation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, even if the pre-variation ending command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect of fading the notice image is performed. Do. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation of movable accessory (board movable body 15)

9. Operation of Movable Board (First Movable Accessory 14 and Second Movable Accessory 15) Operation of the movable board (first movable accessary 14 and second movable accessary 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 49A and 49B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like.

The first movable accessory 14 includes two transparent plate members, a left plate member 14L and a right plate member 14R. Here, the term "plate member having transparency" means that at least a portion of an image or the like located on the opposite side of the plate member can be seen through the plate member, and the image on the opposite side can be seen through the plate member. etc. need not be completely transparent, and may be vaguely transparent. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 can rest at the first position covering part of the display screen 7a by the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R (first mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L covers the left portion of the display screen 7a, and the right side plate member 14R covers the right side portion of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 can stop at the second position shown in FIG. 47 by moving the left side plate member 14L further to the right side and the right side plate member 14R to the left side from the state of FIG. Yes (second mode). At this second position, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. FIG. On the other hand, the left side plate member 14L is retracted to the left side and the right side plate member 14R is retracted to the right side, so that the vehicle can be stopped at the third position (home position) shown in FIG. 48 (third mode). At the third position, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that the area covering the display screen 7a increases when transitioning from the third mode, the first mode, and the second mode in order.

The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body with a face drawn on it. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 46, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a first position (home position) where the rotating body is housed in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. The rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 advances downward from the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 46, and in front of the display screen 7a, a rotating effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). . When the first movable accessory 14 is in the second mode and the second movable accessory 15 is in the second mode, as shown in FIG. can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14. In this way, the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15 can perform a combined effect in which their actions are combined.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modified Examples, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described.
The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, when there is no particular need in the display effect example, the suspension display (suspension icon) and the variable display of decorative symbols are omitted. Furthermore, there are cases where the character CRA is displayed in the example of the display effect, but in this case the explanation may be omitted.

The suspension icon display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. This pending icon display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols or during the stop display. For example, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pending ball number command and the fluctuation stop command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending icon display effect is included, the corresponding image data is transferred from the ROM 103. This is a display effect for reading out and displaying on the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon display effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon display effect A. FIG. In the pending icon display effect A, first, the four pending icons shown in FIG. 50(A) are executed. Specifically, first, a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, a fourth reserved image 9A4, the reserved image 9C, and a first image IM1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. , the second image IM2 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. The first reserved image 9A1 is the leftmost reserved image among the reserved images (holding icons) 9A, and the second reserved image 9A2 is the second reserved image from the left among the reserved images 9A. The third reserved image 9A3 is the third reserved image from the left among the reserved images 9A, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 is the rightmost reserved image among the reserved images 9A. The four reserved images 9A1-9A4 are approximately equal in size.

The first image IM1 is a substantially semicircular image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the circumference. As a result, the positions of the first reserved image 9A1 and the fourth reserved image 9A4 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a are the same. Also, the second reserved image 9A2 and the third reserved image 9A3 have the same position in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a. That is, the second reserved image 9A2 is positioned above the first reserved image 9A1, and the third reserved image 9A3 is positioned above the fourth reserved image 9A4. The sizes of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are smaller than the reserved image 9C. In addition, the upper end of the reserved image 9C is positioned above the display screen 7a than the upper end of the first reserved image 9A1, and is positioned below the display screen 7a than the upper end of the second reserved image 9A2. is doing. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are different in position in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, and a fourth reserved image 9A4 are arranged at approximately equal intervals from the left side.

The second image IM2 is a horizontally long substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and is in contact with the reserved image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 . In FIG. 50(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed, the pending consumption effect shown in FIG. 50(B) is executed. Specifically, the reserved image 9C disappears, and the first reserved image 9A1 moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was. After that, the suspended icon movement effect shown in FIG. 50(C) is executed. Specifically, the first image IM1 rotates to the left by a predetermined angle, and the second reserved image 9A2 moves to the position where the first reserved image 9A1 was. Also, the third reserved image 9A3 moves to the position where the second reserved image 9A2 was. Also, the fourth reserved image 9A4 moves to the position where the third reserved image 9A3 was. After that, as the game ball enters the first start hole 20, the pending icon addition display shown in FIG. 50(D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth reserved image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth reserved image 9A4 was.

[Holding icon display effect B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon display effect B. FIG. The pending icon display effect B differs from the pending icon display effect A in FIG. 50 in the positional relationship between the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4. In the four reserved display of FIG. 51(A), the display screen 7a includes a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, a fourth reserved image 9A4, and the reserved image 9C. , fourth image IM4, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed.

The fourth image IM4 is a substantially stepped image, in which four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged side by side at substantially equal intervals. As a result, the second reserved image 9A2 and the third reserved image 9A3 have the same position in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the positions of the first reserved image 9A1, the fourth reserved image 9A4, and the second reserved image 9A2 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a are different from each other. That is, the second reserved image 9A2 is positioned above the first reserved image 9A1, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 is positioned above the second reserved image 9A2. The sizes of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are smaller than the reserved image 9C. In addition, the upper end of the reserved image 9C is positioned above the display screen 7a than the upper end of the first reserved image 9A1, and is positioned below the display screen 7a than the upper end of the second reserved image 9A2. is doing. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are different in position in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, and a fourth reserved image 9A4 are arranged at approximately equal intervals from the left side.

The reserved image 9C is in contact with the left side of the fourth image IM4. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the fourth image IM4 can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 . In FIG. 51(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed, the pending digest effect shown in FIG. 51(B) is executed. Specifically, the reserved image 9C disappears, and the first reserved image 9A1 moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was. After that, the suspended icon movement effect shown in FIG. 51(C) is executed. Specifically, the second reserved image 9A2 moves to the position where the first reserved image 9A1 was. Also, the third reserved image 9A3 moves to the position where the second reserved image 9A2 was. Also, the fourth reserved image 9A4 moves to the position where the third reserved image 9A3 was. After that, as the game ball enters the first start hole 20, the pending icon addition display shown in FIG. 51(D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth reserved image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth reserved image 9A4 was.

[Hold icon display effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon display effect C. FIG. The suspension icon display effect C differs from the suspension icon display effect A of FIG. 50 in the mutual positional relationship of the four suspension images 9A1 to 9A4. In the four reserved display of FIG. 52(A), the display screen 7a includes a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, a fourth reserved image 9A4, and the reserved image 9C. , fifth image IM5, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

The fifth image IM5 is a substantially slanted image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged side by side at substantially equal intervals. This allows
The positions of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a are different from each other. That is, the second reserved image 9A2 is positioned above the first reserved image 9A1, the third reserved image 9A3 is positioned above the second reserved image 9A2, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 is positioned above the third reserved image 9A2. It is located above the reserved image 9A3. The sizes of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are smaller than the reserved image 9C. In addition, the upper end of the reserved image 9C is located above the upper end of the first reserved image 9A1 on the display screen 7a, and is positioned below the upper end of the second reserved image 9A2 on the display screen 7a. is doing. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are different in position in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, and a fourth reserved image 9A4 are arranged at approximately equal intervals from the left side.

The reserved image 9C is in contact with the left side of the fifth image IM5. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the fifth image IM5 can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 . In FIG. 52(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed, the pending digest effect shown in FIG. 52(B) is executed. Specifically, the reserved image 9C disappears, and the first reserved image 9A1 moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was. After that, the suspended icon movement effect shown in FIG. 52(C) is executed. Specifically, the second reserved image 9A2 moves to the position where the first reserved image 9A1 was. Also, the third reserved image 9A3 moves to the position where the second reserved image 9A2 was. Also, the fourth reserved image 9A4 moves to the position where the third reserved image 9A3 was. After that, as the game ball enters the first start hole 20, the pending icon addition display shown in FIG. 52(D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth reserved image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth reserved image 9A4 was.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, and a fourth reserved image 9A4 are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed, the positions of the first reserved image 9A1 and the second reserved image 9A2 are different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the positions of the third reserved image 9A3 and the fourth reserved image 9A4 are different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. different positions in According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second reserved image 9A2 and the third reserved image 9A3 displayed on the display screen 7a are positioned at the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the first reserved image 9A1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the fourth reserved image 9A4 are positioned at the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the first reserved image 9A1 is smaller than the reserved image 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the first reserved image 9A1, the second reserved image 9A2, the third reserved image 9A3, and the fourth reserved image displayed on the display screen 7a The images 9A4 have different positions in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pending icon display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 and the reserved image 9C are circular. However, the shape of these reserved images can be any shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9C is larger than the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4. However, the size of the reserved image 9C may be the same size as the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4, or may be smaller than these. Also, the shapes and colors of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 may be different from each other.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 partially covers the reserved image 9C. However, the reserved image 9C does not have to be covered by the first movable accessory 14 . Similarly, the second image IM2, the fourth image IM4, and the fifth image IM5 do not have to be covered with the first movable object 14, either.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first pending icon;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second pending icon;
one of the plurality of types of images is a third pending icon;
one of the plurality of types of images is a fourth pending icon;
When the first pending icon, the second pending icon, the third pending icon and the fourth pending icon are displayed on the display means, the first pending icon and the second pending icon are displayed The positions of the means in the first direction are different, and the positions of the third reserved icon and the fourth reserved icon are different in the first direction of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The second pending icon displayed on the display means and the third pending icon are at the same position in the first direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
The first pending icon and the fourth pending icon displayed on the display means are at the same position in the first direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is the pending image;
wherein the first pending icon is smaller than the pending image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4,
The first reserved icon, the second reserved icon, the third reserved icon, and the fourth reserved icon displayed on the display means are different in position in the second direction of the display means. there is
A gaming machine characterized by:

53 to 55, the pending icon visual recognition difficulty effects A to C will be described below. This suspended icon hard-to-recognize effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols or during a ready-to-win effect (super reach effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the suspended icon invisible effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Holding icon hard to see effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon hard-to-recognize effect A. FIG. In the pending icon hard-to-recognize effect A, the pending digestion effect shown in FIG. 53(A) is executed. Specifically, four reserved images 9A, the reserved image 9C, a first image IM1, a second image IM2, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first image IM1 is a substantially semicircular image, and four reserved images 9A are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the circumference of the first image IM1. The size of the four reserved images 9A is smaller than the reserved image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally long substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and is in contact with the reserved image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 .

When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stationary manner after the variable display, as shown in FIG. moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was located. After that, the suspended icon moving effect shown in FIG. 53(B) is executed. Specifically, the first image IM1 is rotated left by a predetermined angle, and the retained image 9A, which was second from the left, moves to the leftmost position. Also, the held image 9A located third from the left moves to the second position from the left. In addition, the rightmost reserved image 9A is also moved leftward by one. That is, the first image IM1 rotates along with the shift of the reserved image 9A. Then, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 53(C) is executed. Here, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 are faded out from the display screen 7a and become difficult to see. Specifically, the reserved image 9A and the first image IM1 gradually become faint, so that they become gradually difficult to see. At this time, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 do not fade out from the display screen 7a. By gradually fading the pending image 9A and the first image IM1, the pending icon hard-to-recognize effect shown in FIG. 53(D) is executed. That is, the pending icon fade-out effect makes the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 difficult to see. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 are not difficult to see.

[Holding icon hard to see effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon hard-to-recognize effect B. FIG. The suspended icon difficult-to-recognize effect B differs from the suspended icon difficult-to-recognize effect A of FIG. 53 in the aspect of the first image IM1. In the pending digest effect of FIG. 54(A), four pending images 9A, the pending image 9C, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed. The first image IM1 is a rectangular frame image, and four reserved images 9A are arranged one by one in the frame. Again, the pending image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. The size of the four reserved images 9A is smaller than the reserved image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally long substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and is in contact with the reserved image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 .

When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stationary manner after the variable display, the reserved image 9C disappears and the leftmost reserved image 9A out of the four reserved images 9A is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(A). moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was located. After that, the suspended icon movement effect shown in FIG. 54(B) is executed. Specifically, the frame inside the first image IM1 is moved leftward by a predetermined distance, and the second held image 9A from the left is moved together with the frame to the leftmost position. Also, the held image 9A located third from the left moves to the second position from the left. In addition, the rightmost reserved image 9A is also moved leftward by one. At the right end of the first image IM1, a frame image without the pending image 9A appears leftward from the right end. In other words, the first image IM1 slides along with the shift of the pending image 9A. Then, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the suspended icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 54(C) is executed. Here, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 are faded out from the display screen 7a and become difficult to see. Specifically, as the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 move downward, they gradually become difficult to see. At this time, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 do not fade out from the display screen 7a. By moving the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 downward, the pending icon hard-to-recognize effect shown in FIG. 54(D) is executed. That is, the pending icon fade-out effect makes the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 difficult to see. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 are not difficult to see.

[Holding icon hard-to-see effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon hard-to-recognize effect C. FIG. The suspended icon difficult-to-recognize effect C differs from the suspended icon difficult-to-recognize effect A of FIG. 53 in the aspect of the first image IM1. In the pending digest effect of FIG. 55(A), four pending images 9A, the pending image 9C, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed. The first image IM1 is an image representing a conveyor (belt conveyor), and four reserved images 9A are arranged at approximately equal intervals on the conveyor. That is, even here, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. The size of the four reserved images 9A is smaller than the reserved image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally long substantially rectangular image provided along the lower end of 7a, and the reserved image 9C and the first image IM1 are in contact. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 .

When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stationary manner after the variable display, as shown in FIG. moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was located. After that, the suspended icon movement effect shown in FIG. 55(B) is executed. Specifically, the conveyor for the first image IM1 is driven, and the second retained image 9A from the left moves to the leftmost position. Also, the held image 9A located third from the left moves to the second position from the left. In addition, the rightmost reserved image 9A is also moved leftward by one. In other words, the first image IM1 performs the driving operation with the shift of the reserved image 9A. Then, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 55(C) is executed. Here, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 are faded out from the display screen 7a and become difficult to see. Specifically, a rectangular third image IM3 appears from the lower right of the display screen 7a, and by covering the reserved image 9A and the first image IM1, it becomes gradually difficult to see. At this time, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 are not covered with the third image IM3 and do not fade out from the display screen 7a. By covering the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 with the third image IM3, the pending icon hard-to-recognize effect shown in FIG. 55(D) is executed. That is, the pending icon fade-out effect makes the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 difficult to see. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 are not difficult to see.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon visibility difficulty effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the first image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pending image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. An effect and a second effect in which the first image IM1 becomes gradually difficult to see can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the second effect, the first image IM1 gradually becomes faint and becomes difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the first image IM1 moves along with the movement of the pending image 9A while the pending image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. It is possible to execute a third effect to perform. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the first effect, the second image IM2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pending image 9C is displayed as the second image IM2. Displayed so as to touch at least a portion. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the second effect, the second image IM2 and the pending image 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first image IM1 is gradually visible. While it becomes difficult, the second image IM2 and the reserved image 9C do not become difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the above-described pending icon visual recognition difficulty effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are circular. However, the shape of these reserved images can be any shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9C is larger than the reserved image 9A. However, the size of the reserved image 9C may be the same size as the reserved image 9A, or may be smaller than these. Further, the shape and color of the reserved images 9A may be different from each other.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 partially covers the reserved image 9C. However, the reserved image 9C does not have to be covered by the first movable accessory 14 . Likewise, the second image IM2 does not have to be covered with the first movable accessory 14 .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
a first effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the first image in a state where the first image is displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which the first image becomes gradually difficult to see,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
In the second effect, the first image gradually fades to become difficult to see,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
In a state where the suspended icon is displayed on the first image, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the first image moves as the suspended icon moves,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is the pending image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
In the first effect, the second image is displayed on the display means, and the pending image is displayed so as to be in contact with at least a portion of the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4,
In the second effect, the second image and the pending image are displayed on the display means, and the first image gradually becomes difficult to see, while the second image and the pending image are displayed. Suspended images do not become difficult to see,
A gaming machine characterized by:

56 to 58, the decorative symbol variation display effects will be described below. This decorative design variable display effect is during the variable display of the decorative design synchronized with the variation of the first special design or the second special design (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special design") (during one time variable display). , game state is normal state, high probability state, time saving state, electric chew support (state in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win the second start port 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support") and so on.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation display effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect A. FIG.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56A, the decorative symbol variation start effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation start effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height position as shown in FIG. . The middle decorative pattern 8C is located above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise as indicated by the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative design variation start effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R show a state where they are stopped in the losing design array ("589"). The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(B), a decorative symbol ready-to-win effect is executed. In this decorative design ready-to-win performance, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the jackpot design arrangement, and the middle decorative design 8C is fluctuating in the variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R. In this example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped at "9", and the middle decorative design 8C is indicated by the arrow YC during fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(C), a middle decorative symbol display position change effect is executed. In this medium decorative pattern display position change effect, the display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes downward from the ready-to-win pattern arrangement shown in FIG. there is More specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R show the ready-to-win pattern arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. 56(B). On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned straight downward from the display position shown in FIG. In position, the display position changes. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise at the lowered position.

That is, in the decorative design variation display effect A shown in FIG. 56, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are more variable than the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the variation before the reach. When the variable display is performed on the upper side and reach is formed by the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed to be lower than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. , the variable display is performed.
That is, in the decorative design fluctuation display effect A, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative patterns fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C as the second decorative pattern is displayed in the first direction. 2, and when the first decorative pattern reaches reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative pattern changes.

[Decorative pattern variation display effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect B. FIG.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the decorative symbol variation start/suspension digestion effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. In the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the middle pattern display area, and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the right pattern display area. The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height position as shown in FIG. . The middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise as indicated by the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start/suspend digest effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R show a state in which they are stopped at the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped.
In addition, in the decorative symbol variation start/suspend digest effect, a suspend effect image HG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The pending effect image HG is displayed in an arc shape, and a pending icon indicating the number of pending special symbols is displayed in the display area. In addition, in FIG. 57(A), the first suspension H1 and the second suspension H2 are displayed as suspension icons. Also, the suspension icon HT is displayed to the left of the suspension effect image HG. The pending effect image HG rotates counterclockwise as indicated by an arrow YH1 when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Accordingly, the hold icon within the display area of the hold effect image HG also rotates counterclockwise. When the pending effect image HG rotates, the first pending H1 moves to the position of the relevant pending icon HT as indicated by the arrow YH2, and at the same time, the pending icons within the display area of the pending effect image HG are shifted one by one. (For example, the second hold H2 moves to the display position of the first hold H1, and the other third and fourth holds are the same). In addition, FIG. 57(A) shows the state when the variation of the decorative design is started in a state where there are three reservations.
That is, in the decorative design fluctuation start/suspend digest effect, when the decorative design fluctuation is opened, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction as shown by the arrow YL and the arrow YR, and the middle decorative design 8C As shown by the arrow YC, it oscillates counterclockwise along the arc, and the hold icon moves counterclockwise along the arc, as shown by the arrow YH1. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the reserved icon move in opposite directions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), a decorative symbol ready-to-win effect is executed. In this decorative design ready-to-win performance, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the jackpot design arrangement, and the middle decorative design 8C is fluctuating in the variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R. In this example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped at "9", and the middle decorative design 8C is indicated by the arrow YC during fluctuation. In addition, in this decorative design ready-to-win effect, the number of reserved special symbols shows that the third reserved H3 and the fourth reserved H4 have increased (increased by two) from the number shown in FIG. 57(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(C), a middle decorative symbol display position change effect is executed. In this medium decorative pattern display position change effect, the display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes downward from the ready-to-win pattern arrangement shown in FIG. there is More specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R show the ready-to-win pattern arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. 57(B). On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is located at a position that is lowered from the display position shown in FIG. The display position changes to a position lower than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise at the lowered position.

That is, in the decorative design variation display effect B shown in FIG. 57, when the variation of the decorative designs starts, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction, and the middle decorative design 8C moves along the arc. The reserved icon moves counterclockwise in the direction along the arc and in the opposite direction to the middle decorative symbol 8C. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate before becoming ready-to-win, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed above the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern are displayed. When reach is formed with the pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C changes its display position and descends in a direction approaching the holding icon (holding effect image HG) side, and is lower than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Variable display is performed on the lower side.
That is, in the decorative design fluctuation display performance B, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative patterns fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C as the second decorative pattern is displayed in the first direction. 2, the holding icon moves in the left-right direction as the third direction opposite to the second direction, and the first decorative pattern moves to the reach as the predetermined pattern arrangement. When it becomes, the second decorative pattern is configured such that the display position of the variable display changes in the direction of approaching the holding icon side.

[Decorative pattern variation display effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect C. FIG.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the decorative symbol variation start/suspension digestion effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the middle pattern display area, and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the right pattern display area. The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height position as shown in FIG. The middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise as indicated by the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start/suspend digest effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R show a state in which they are stopped at the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped.
In addition, in the decorative symbol variation start/suspend digest effect, a suspend effect image HG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The pending effect image HG is displayed in an arc shape, and a pending icon indicating the number of pending special symbols is displayed in the display area. In addition, in FIG. 58A, the first suspension H1 and the second suspension H2 are displayed as suspension icons. Also, the suspension icon HT is displayed to the left of the suspension effect image HG. The pending effect image HG rotates counterclockwise as indicated by an arrow YH1 when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Accordingly, the hold icon within the display area of the hold effect image HG also rotates counterclockwise. When the pending effect image HG rotates, the first pending H1 moves to the position of the relevant pending icon HT as indicated by the arrow YH2, and at the same time, the pending icons within the display area of the pending effect image HG are shifted one by one. (For example, the second hold H2 moves to the display position of the first hold H1, and the other third and fourth holds are the same). In addition, FIG. 58(A) shows the state when the variation of the decorative design is started in the state where there are three reservations.
That is, in the decorative design fluctuation start/suspend digest effect, when the decorative design fluctuation is opened, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction as shown by the arrow YL and the arrow YR, and the middle decorative design 8C As shown by the arrow YC, it oscillates counterclockwise along the arc, and the hold icon moves counterclockwise along the arc, as shown by the arrow YH1. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the reserved icon move in opposite directions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(B), a decorative symbol ready-to-win effect is executed. In this decorative design ready-to-win performance, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the jackpot design arrangement, and the middle decorative design 8C is fluctuating in the variation of the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R. In this example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped at "9", and the middle decorative design 8C is indicated by the arrow YC during fluctuation. In addition, in this decorative design ready-to-win effect, the number of reserved special symbols shows that the third reserved H3 and the fourth reserved H4 have increased (increased by two) from the number shown in FIG. 58(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a middle decorative symbol display position change effect is executed. In this medium decorative pattern display position change effect, the display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes downward from the ready-to-win pattern arrangement shown in FIG. there is More specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R show the ready-to-win pattern arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. 58(B). On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is moved from the display position shown in FIG. changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(D), a medium decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this medium decorative design variation effect, the variable display mode of the medium decorative design 8C after execution of the medium decorative design display position change performance shown in FIG. 58(C) is shown. The middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise in this lowered position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 58(D), the middle decorative design 8C moves through the front sides of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. Therefore, due to the variation of the middle decorative design 8C, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R partially overlap with the middle decorative design 8C and disappear. Further, when the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches substantially the middle between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned at substantially the same height as the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In the middle decorative design variation effect, the middle decorative design 8C has "8" positioned between the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, "9" overlapping the left decorative design 8L, and "7" on the right. It shows how it overlaps with the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(E), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, as a result of execution of the middle decorative pattern variation performance shown in FIG. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a character "Big Win!" is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the jackpot has been decided.
Here, in a state where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped in the jackpot pattern array, the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned at substantially the same height as the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R and is positioned horizontally as indicated by the horizontal line HL. stop in parallel to In other words, if the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes a loose pattern arrangement without going through the reach, as shown in FIG. In the case of the lost pattern arrangement and the jackpot pattern arrangement, as shown in FIG. 58(E), the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are aligned linearly and stopped.

That is, in the decorative design variation display effect C shown in FIG. 58, when the reach is formed by the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the display position of the middle decorative design 8C changes and the reserved icon (hold It descends in a direction approaching the performance image HG) side, and at this descending position, it moves through the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is horizontally arranged between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Stop.
That is, in the decorative design variation display effect C, when the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative patterns become reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the middle decorative design 8C as the second decorative design is It is configured to pass through the front side of the first decorative pattern and stop in line with the first decorative pattern in a straight line.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation display production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative patterns fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the second decorative patterns , the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates in the left-right direction as the second direction, and when the first decorative pattern reaches the reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable display position. is configured to change. According to this configuration, when the ready-to-win situation occurs, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative pattern changes, so that the player can face the game with high expectations when the ready-to-win situation occurs. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, when the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction. The middle decorative pattern 8C as the second decorative pattern moves in the left-right direction along the arc as the second direction, and the suspended icon moves in the third direction opposite to the second direction. It is configured to move left and right along an arc. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the reserved icon move in different directions in different manners, so that the player can start fluctuating the decorative patterns. You can enjoy the production of various movements in time. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the second decorative symbols The middle decorative pattern 8C as moves in the left-right direction along the arc as the second direction, and the reserved icon moves in the left-right direction along the arc as the third direction opposite to the second direction. When the first decorative pattern is moved and becomes ready-to-win as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the second decorative pattern is configured such that the display position of the variable display changes in the direction of approaching the holding icon side. According to this configuration, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative pattern changes in the direction of approaching the holding icon side, and the second decorative pattern and the holding icon approach each other. Since the player moves along the arc in the opposite direction, the player can greatly enjoy the performance by the movement of the second decorative symbol and the hold icon at the time of reach. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols become the ready-to-win as the predetermined pattern arrangement, the second decorative symbols are displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C passes through the front side of the first decorative pattern and stops in line with the first decorative pattern. According to this configuration, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the second decorative pattern, which is the final stop pattern, is closed up, so that the player can concentrate on the variable display of the second decorative pattern to see whether or not the player will win the jackpot. You can live happily ever after. Further, when the second decorative pattern is stopped, it stops in line with the first decorative pattern, so that the fixed pattern arrangement is extremely easy to see, and the player can easily confirm the fixed pattern arrangement. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative symbol variation display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates in the horizontal direction. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may fluctuate in the horizontal direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C may fluctuate in the vertical direction. In short, it suffices that the fluctuation directions of symbols other than the final stop symbol and the final stop symbol are different directions.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, when reach is reached, the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when reaching reach, the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C may not be changed, and the display position may be changed while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C is Although the display position is changed to the lower position in the direction of approaching the holding icon (holding effect image HG) straight below, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when reaching reach, the middle decorative pattern 8C may swing downward and approach the holding icon side. Alternatively, the display position may be raised so that the middle decorative design 8C approaches the reserved icon side and the reserved icon also approaches the middle decorative design 8C side.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves through the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and moves to the left decorative pattern 8L. The display of the right decorative pattern 8R is partially overlapped with the middle decorative pattern 8C so that it cannot be seen, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when reaching the reach, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed so as to pass in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R so that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R cannot be seen at all. good too. In this case, only the middle decorative pattern 8C may be enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when reaching reach and the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C is lowered toward the holding icon (holding effect image HG), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the holding icon ( Although a predetermined gap is formed between the holding effect image HG), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C is lowered in reach, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the pending icon (holding effect image HG) may contact or partially overlap each other.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with decorative pattern display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative patterns,
The decorative pattern display means includes:
At least the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be variably displayed,
The first decorative pattern fluctuates in a first direction,
the second decorative design varies in a second direction and stops after the first decorative design;
When the first decorative pattern becomes a predetermined pattern arrangement, the display position of the second decorative pattern changes in the variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C3-2]
A display means capable of displaying a pending icon is provided,
The display means moves the pending icon in a third direction opposite to the second direction when the decorative pattern starts to change,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-3]
When the first decorative pattern becomes the predetermined pattern arrangement, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative pattern changes in a direction approaching the holding icon side,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-4]
The first decorative design is a left and right decorative design, the second decorative design is a middle decorative design,
The first direction is a vertical direction, and the second direction and the third direction are directions along an arc.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2 or aspect C3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-5]
When the first decorative pattern is in the predetermined pattern arrangement, the second decorative pattern passes through the front side of the first decorative pattern and is aligned linearly with the first decorative pattern. Stop,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4, characterized by:

59 to 61, description will be given of the performance corresponding to suspension. This pending effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Holding corresponding production A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the suspension corresponding effect A. FIG.
First, in the suspension corresponding effect A, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a suspension display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, a suspension display area C41 and the character CRA are displayed. The pending display area C41 is a display area for displaying pending icons, and displays a first pending icon 9A and a second pending icon 9C. The pending display area C41 is divided into five so as to store four first pending icons 9A and one second pending icon 9C. Incidentally, in the pending display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this suspension display effect, the colors of the first suspension icon 9A and the second suspension icon 9C are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a pending corresponding area C42 corresponding to the pending display area C41 is displayed. The pending corresponding region C42 is provided adjacent to the pending display region C41, and more specifically, is provided in connection with the upper portion of the pending display region C41. The reservation corresponding area C42 includes four areas respectively corresponding to the four sections storing the first reservation icon 9A in the reservation display area C41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), a corresponding area selection effect is executed. In this corresponding area selection effect, a plurality of options for effects are variably displayed in one of the four areas of the reserved corresponding area C42. This option includes a display that suggests a pending change, a display that suggests a reach production that will develop in the future, a display that suggests a chance increase such as "hot" or "chance", a display that suggests a big hit, etc. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(D), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this pending change suggesting effect, the option that has been fluctuating in the corresponding region selection effect is stopped in the pending corresponding region C42, and a display suggesting pending change is performed. In the example of FIG. 59(D), the display suggesting pending change is expressed as "maintenance".

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), a pending change effect is executed. In this pending change effect, the first pending icon 9A in the section of the pending display area C41 corresponding to the area where the display suggesting the pending change is performed in the pending corresponding area C42 is displayed to change the pending icon. . In this case, the color of the first pending icon 9A is changed to red or the like. A plurality of colors such as blue, yellow, and green may be prepared for the pending icon to change, and the specification may be such that the expected degree of jackpot is different for each color.
Incidentally, FIGS. 59(C) to (E) are effects with at least the same variation.

[Holding corresponding production B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the suspension corresponding effect B. FIG.
First, in the suspension corresponding effect B, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a suspension display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, a suspension display area C41 and the character CRA are displayed. The pending display area C41 is a display area for displaying pending icons, and displays a first pending icon 9A and a second pending icon 9C. The pending display area C41 is divided into five so as to store four first pending icons 9A and one second pending icon 9C. Incidentally, in the pending display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this suspension display effect, the colors of the first suspension icon 9A and the second suspension icon 9C are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a pending corresponding area C42 corresponding to the pending display area C41 is displayed. The pending corresponding region C42 is provided adjacent to the pending display region C41, and more specifically, is provided in connection with the upper portion of the pending display region C41. The reservation corresponding area C42 includes four areas respectively corresponding to the four sections storing the first reservation icon 9A in the reservation display area C41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), a corresponding area selection effect is executed. In this corresponding area selection effect, a plurality of options for effects are variably displayed in one of the four areas of the reserved corresponding area C42. This option includes a display that suggests a pending change, a display that suggests a reach production that will develop in the future, a display that suggests a chance increase such as "hot" or "chance", a display that suggests a big hit, etc. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), a ready-to-win suggestion effect is executed. In this ready-to-win suggesting effect, the option that has been changed in the corresponding area selection effect in the reserved corresponding area C42 is stopped, and a display to suggest the ready-to-win effect to be developed in the future is performed. In the example of FIG. 60(D), the display suggesting the ready-to-reach effect is represented as "super reach A", that is, the ready-to-reach effect to be developed in the future is the super ready-to-reach effect, and the super reach effect in the super reach effect. Reach A is indicated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a super ready-to-win effect is executed. In this super ready-to-win production, a production is performed in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. This super reach effect is performed with a variation different from the variation in which the reach suggestion effect of FIG. 60 (D) is performed. The first suspension icon 9A in the partition of the suspension display area C41 corresponding to the performed area is performed by the suspension.

[Holding corresponding production C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the suspension corresponding effect C. FIG.
First, in the suspension corresponding effect C, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a suspension display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, a suspension display area C41 and the character CRA are displayed. The pending display area C41 is a display area for displaying pending icons, and displays a first pending icon 9A and a second pending icon 9C. The pending display area C41 is divided into five so as to store four first pending icons 9A and one second pending icon 9C. Incidentally, in the pending display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this suspension display effect, the colors of the first suspension icon 9A and the second suspension icon 9C are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a pending corresponding area C42 corresponding to the pending display area C41 is displayed. The pending corresponding region C42 is provided adjacent to the pending display region C41, and more specifically, is provided in connection with the upper portion of the pending display region C41. The reservation corresponding area C42 has one area corresponding to the four sections storing the first reservation icon 9A in the reservation display area C41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), a corresponding area selection effect is executed. In this corresponding area selection effect, a plurality of options are variably displayed in the reserved corresponding area C42. This option includes a display that suggests a pending change, a display that suggests a reach production that will develop in the future, a display that suggests a chance increase such as "hot" or "chance", a display that suggests a big hit, etc. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), a ready-to-win suggestion effect is executed. In this ready-to-win suggesting effect, the option that has been changed in the corresponding area selection effect in the reserved corresponding area C42 is stopped, and a display to suggest the ready-to-win effect to be developed in the future is performed. In the example of FIG. 61(D), the display suggesting the ready-to-reach effect is represented as "super reach A", that is, the ready-to-reach effect to be developed in the future is the super ready-to-reach effect, and the super reach effect in the super reach effect. Reach A is indicated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), a super ready-to-win effect is executed. In this super ready-to-win production, a production is performed in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. This super ready-to-win effect is performed with a variation different from the variation in which the ready-to-win suggestive effect of FIG. 61(D) is performed or the variation different from the variation in which the ready-to-win suggestive effect of FIG. 61(D) is performed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the suspension corresponding production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the suspension corresponding effect, a plurality of options of the effect are variably displayed in the suspension corresponding area C42 corresponding to the suspension display area C41, one of the options is selected, and the selected effect I am trying to run According to this configuration, since one of the plurality of effects is executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the suspension corresponding effect, a plurality of options for the effect are variably displayed in the suspension corresponding area C42 corresponding to the suspension display area C41, and the display suggesting the suspension change is selected from among the options. , to execute the selected rendition. According to this configuration, since a display suggesting a pending change is performed in the pending display area C41, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the suspension corresponding effect, a plurality of effect options are variably displayed in the suspension corresponding area C42 corresponding to the suspension display area C41, and the display suggesting the ready-to-win effect is selected from among the options. , to execute the selected rendition. According to this configuration, a display suggesting a ready-to-win effect is performed in the reserved display area C41, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the suspension corresponding effect, the suspension corresponding area C42 is divided into a plurality of areas so as to correspond to the suspension display area C41. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest and display a predetermined effect in the suspension corresponding area C42 in association with the suspension icon in the suspension display area C41, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the suspension corresponding area C42 is arranged adjacent to the suspension display area C41 in the suspension corresponding effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a suggestive display of a predetermined effect in the suspension corresponding area C42 corresponding to the suspension icon in the suspension display area C41, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production|presentation production corresponding to suspension|holding is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold change effect of the hold corresponding effect A, the target of the first hold icon 9A to be changed to hold corresponds to the area where the display suggesting the change of hold is performed in the hold corresponding area C42. Although the first suspension icon 9A in the partition of the suspension display area C41 is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the first suspension icon 9A to be subjected to the suspension change is suggested to be the suspension change in the suspension corresponding area C42. It is good also as the 1st suspension icon 9A other than division of suspension display area C41 corresponding to the field where the display was performed, and it is good also as the 2nd suspension icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the super ready-to-win effect of the suspension corresponding effect B, the target for the ready-to-win effect suggested by the ready-to-win effect is set to the area where the display suggesting the ready-to-win effect is performed in the pending corresponding area C42. Although the first pending icon 9A in the section of the corresponding pending display area C41 is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target for the ready-to-win effect suggested by the ready-to-win suggesting effect is displayed in the pending corresponding area C42. It may be the first pending icon 9A or the second pending icon 9C other than the division of the pending display area C41 corresponding to the area where the display suggesting the effect was performed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the suspension corresponding effects A to C, a suspension corresponding area C42 corresponding to the second suspension icon 9C may be provided.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the suspension corresponding effects A and B, the suspension corresponding area C42 is divided into four areas so as to respectively correspond to the four compartments storing the first suspension icon 9A in the suspension display area C41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be divided into two or three regions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect that displays a first mode in a hold corresponding area corresponding to a hold display area that displays a hold,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second mode in the holding corresponding area corresponding to the holding display area,
The third display effect is an effect of selecting one mode from a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode and displaying the selected mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As the display of the first aspect of the first display effect, including a hold change suggestion display that suggests that the hold will change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As the display of the second aspect of the second display effect, including a reach suggestion display that suggests the type of reach effect performed with the variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The reserved display area is divided into a plurality of areas including a first reserved display area and a second reserved display area,
The reserved corresponding area comprises a plurality of corresponding areas respectively corresponding to the plurality of areas divided in the reserved display area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The reserved corresponding area is arranged adjacent to the reserved display area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

62 to 64, description will be given of the performance corresponding to suspension. This pending jumping performance can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Hold Jumpover Production A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the pending jumpover effect A. FIG.
First, in the holding jump over effect A, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the holding display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, a suspension display area C51 and the character CRA are displayed. The pending display area C51 is a display area for displaying pending icons, and displays a first pending icon 9A and a second pending icon 9C. The pending display area C51 is divided into five so that four first pending icons 9A and one second pending icon 9C can be stored. Incidentally, in the pending display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this suspension display effect, the colors of the first suspension icon 9A and the second suspension icon 9C are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this hold change suggesting effect, the ally character CRA throws a pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it across the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. Note that the pseudo hold icon C52 is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), a pending change suggestion image superimposition effect is executed. In this pending change suggesting image superimposition effect, the pseudo pending icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the pending change suggesting effect moves to the second pending icon 9C, and the pseudo pending icon C52 and the second pending icon 9C are superimposed. It is a performance to do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), a pending change effect is executed. In this pending change effect, the second pending icon 9C superimposed by moving the pseudo pending icon C52 is displayed to change in the pending display area C51. In this case, the color of the second pending icon 9C is changed to red like the pseudo pending icon C52. A plurality of colors such as blue, yellow, and green may be prepared for the pending icon to change, and the specification may be such that the expected degree of jackpot is different for each color.
It should be noted that FIGS. 62A to 62D are effects with the same variation.

[Hold Jumpover Production B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the pending jumpover effect B. FIG.
First, in the holding jump over effect B, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the holding display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, a suspension display area C51 and the character CRA are displayed. The pending display area C51 is a display area for displaying pending icons, and displays a first pending icon 9A and a second pending icon 9C. The pending display area C51 is divided into five so that four first pending icons 9A and one second pending icon 9C can be stored. Incidentally, in the pending display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this suspension display effect, the colors of the first suspension icon 9A and the second suspension icon 9C are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this hold change suggesting effect, the ally character CRA throws a pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it across the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. Note that the pseudo hold icon C52 is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a pending change suggesting image disappearing effect is executed. In this pending change suggesting image disappearing effect, the pseudo pending icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the pending change suggesting effect passes the second pending icon 9C, and the pseudo pending icon C52 disappears from the screen. The pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen without passing the second hold icon 9C. For example, the pseudo pending icon C52 may pass between the second pending icon 9C and the first pending icon 9A and disappear from the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a pending non-change effect is executed. In this hold non-change effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 does not act in the hold display area C51, and both the second hold icon 9C and the first hold icon 9A do not change hold.
It should be noted that FIGS. 63A to 63D show effects with the same variation.

[Hold Jumpover Production C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the pending jumpover effect C. FIG.
First, in the holding jump over effect B, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the holding display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, a suspension display area C51 and the character CRA are displayed. The pending display area C51 is a display area for displaying pending icons, and displays a first pending icon 9A and a second pending icon 9C. The pending display area C51 is divided into five so that four first pending icons 9A and one second pending icon 9C can be stored. Incidentally, in the pending display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this suspension display effect, the colors of the first suspension icon 9A and the second suspension icon 9C are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this hold change suggesting effect, the ally character CRA throws a pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it across the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. Note that the pseudo hold icon C52 is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a pending change suggestive image disappearing effect is executed. In this pending change suggesting image disappearing effect, the pseudo pending icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the pending change suggesting effect passes the second pending icon 9C, and the pseudo pending icon C52 disappears from the screen. The pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen without passing the second hold icon 9C. For example, the pseudo pending icon C52 may pass between the second pending icon 9C and the first pending icon 9A and disappear from the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a pending non-change effect is executed. In this hold non-change effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 does not act in the hold display area C51, and both the second hold icon 9C and the first hold icon 9A do not change hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this pending change suggesting effect, the ally character CRA throws the pseudo pending icon C52 again and moves it across the pending icon displayed in the pending display area C51.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a pending change suggestion image superimposition effect is executed. In this pending change suggesting image superimposition effect, the pseudo pending icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the pending change suggesting effect moves to the second pending icon 9C, and the pseudo pending icon C52 and the second pending icon 9C are superimposed. It is a performance to do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a pending change effect is executed. In this pending change effect, the second pending icon 9C superimposed by moving the pseudo pending icon C52 is displayed to change in the pending display area C51. In this case, the color of the second pending icon 9C is changed to red like the pseudo pending icon C52. A plurality of colors such as blue, yellow, and green may be prepared for the pending icon to change, and the specification may be such that the expected degree of jackpot is different for each color.
It should be noted that FIGS. 64A to 64G show effects with the same variation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the holding jump over effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold over jump effect, when the hold display area C51 is being performed, the hold change suggestion effect is performed, and then the hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the attraction of the game can be improved by the suspension change suggestion effect and the suspension change effect.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold jump over effect, the hold change suggesting image superimposition effect is performed after the hold change suggesting effect, and then the hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the hold change effect is performed after the hold change suggestion image superimposed effect, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold jump over effect, after the hold change suggesting effect, the hold change suggesting image disappearing effect is performed, and thereafter the hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the game player is once discouraged by the suspension change suggesting image disappearance effect, and then the suspension change effect is performed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the holding jump over effect, after the hold change suggesting effect, the hold change suggesting image disappearing effect is performed, and then the hold change suggesting effect is performed again, and then the hold change effect is performed. It's becoming According to this configuration, the game player is once discouraged by the suspension change suggesting image disappearance effect, and then the suspension change effect is performed through the suspension change suggesting effect, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo hold icon C52 has the same shape as the hold icon in the holding jumping effect. According to this configuration, the player can look at the pseudo-hold icon C52 and expect a change in hold, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the holding jump over effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo hold icon C52 is superimposed on the second hold icon 9C, and the second hold icon 9C changes to hold in the hold jumping effects A and C. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the pseudo pending icon C52 may be superimposed on the first pending icon 9A, and the first pending icon 9A may be changed to pending.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo hold icon C52 has the same shape as the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C in the holding jumping effects A to C, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the pseudo hold icon C52 may have a different shape. Also in this case, the color of the pseudo hold icon C52 is set to the color desired to be changed to hold.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The pending icon includes an icon representing pending and an icon representing the pending,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a pending display area displaying the pending icon,
The second display effect is an effect of moving a pending change suggesting image that suggests a change in pending so as to straddle the pending icon displayed in the pending display area,
The third display effect is a effect of changing the hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of superimposing the suspension change suggesting image on a specific suspension icon displayed in the suspension display area,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of temporarily disappearing the pending change suggesting image outside the pending display area,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3,
In the combination effect, after the second display effect, the fifth display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed again, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The pending change suggestive image has a shape similar to the pending icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. This decorative symbol display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols or before the stop display. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative pattern display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a.

[Decorative pattern display effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display effect A. FIG. In the decorative symbol display effect A, first, the decorative symbol rotation effect of FIG. 65(A) is executed. Specifically, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the right decorative design 8R is larger than the middle decorative design 8C, and the middle decorative design 8C is larger than the left decorative design 8L. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each rotate horizontally about the vertical direction of the display screen 7a as a rotation axis. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode.

Next, the decorative symbol right superimposition effect shown in FIG. 65(B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L is partially overlaid with the middle decorative design 8C, and the middle decorative design 8C is partially overlaid with the right decorative design 8R. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. A part of the right decorative pattern 8R is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14. - 特許庁The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each face leftward. The main surfaces are main surfaces on which numbers are displayed in the three-dimensional decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and are formed on both sides of the end surface shown in FIG. 65(A). Here, it means that the direction in which the number "7" is facing is the left direction.

Next, the decorative symbol left superimposition effect shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on a part of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L is superimposed on a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than the right decorative pattern 8R. A part of the left decorative pattern 8L is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14. - 特許庁The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R each have their main surfaces directed rightward. In other words, it means that the direction in which the number "7" is facing is the right direction.

Next, the medium decorative design small display effect shown in FIG. 65(D) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative design 8C smaller than both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is displayed without overlapping with both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with different orientations of their main faces. Here, it means that the direction in which the number "7" faces is different. A part of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14. - 特許庁

Next, the decorative symbol center superimposition effect shown in FIG. 65(E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on each part of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed so that a part of each protrudes from the display screen 7a. Next, the shape effect such as the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 65(F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the same size and arranged at regular intervals.

[Decorative pattern display effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display effect B. FIG. The decorative design display effect B differs from the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65 in the aspects of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. In the decorative symbol rotation effect of FIG. 66(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, similarly to the decorative symbol display effect A of FIG. On the other hand, unlike the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are equal in size to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, the decorative symbol right superimposition effect shown in FIG. 66(B) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65, the middle decorative design 8C is superimposed on a part of the left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R is superimposed on a part of the middle decorative design 8C. On the other hand, unlike the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65, the sizes of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are the same. Next, the decorative symbol left superimposition effect shown in FIG. 66(C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on a part of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L is superimposed on a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same.

Next, the middle decorative design small display effect shown in FIG. 66(D) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative design 8C smaller than both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is displayed without overlapping with both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. Unlike the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R have their main surfaces facing the same direction.

Next, the decorative symbol center superimposition effect shown in FIG. 66(E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on each part of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. Unlike the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R do not protrude from the display screen 7a. Next, the shape effect such as the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 66(F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the same size and arranged at regular intervals.

[Decorative pattern display effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display effect C. FIG. The decorative design display effect C differs from the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65 in the aspects of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. In FIG. 67(A), a decorative symbol reversal effect is executed. Specifically, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. As for the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are equal in size. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed with a horizontally reversed number. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode.

Next, the decorative symbol right superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67(B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L is partially overlapped with the middle decorative design 8C, and the middle decorative design 8C is partially overlapped with the right decorative design 8R. The size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each face the front. Next, the decorative symbol left superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67(C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on a part of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L is superimposed on a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each face the front.

Next, the middle decorative design small display effect shown in FIG. 67(D) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative design 8C smaller than both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is displayed without overlapping with both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each face the front.

Next, the decorative symbol center superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67(E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on each part of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R do not protrude from the display screen 7a. Next, the shape effect such as the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 67(F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the same size and arranged at regular intervals.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern is displayed. A first effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps a part of the 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and after the first production, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A second effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C smaller than both of the above is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, after the second effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a part of each of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. A third effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, in the first effect, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than the right decorative pattern 8R. is also displayed large. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, in the second effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with their main faces facing in different directions. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, in the third effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged so that a part of each protrudes from the display screen 7a. to be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the above-described decorative pattern display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are all set to "7". However, the decorative design display performance can be executed even when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are numbers other than "7". Also, the decorative design display effect may be executed when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R have different numbers.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative design reversal effect of FIG. 67(A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are left and right reversed even for a moment. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate vertically and horizontally, respectively, and may be temporarily reversed horizontally, or the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern The pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may rotate vertically or horizontally as a whole, and may be temporarily reversed horizontally.

[Modification 3]
65 to 67, the decorative pattern display effects include a decorative pattern right superimposed effect, a decorative pattern left superimposed effect, a middle decorative pattern small display effect, a decorative pattern center superimposed effect, and a shape effect such as a decorative pattern. . However, some of these may not be included. Also, effects other than these effects may be included.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a left decorative design,
one of the plurality of types of images is a middle decorative design,
one of the plurality of types of images is a right decorative design,
In a state in which the left decorative design, the middle decorative design and the right decorative design are displayed on the display means, the middle decorative design overlaps a part of the right decorative design, and the left decoration is partially superimposed on the middle decorative design. A first effect in which the patterns are overlapped and displayed;
After the first effect, the middle decorative design smaller than both the left decorative design and the right decorative design is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative design and the right decorative design. capable of directing and
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the middle decorative pattern is displayed overlapping a part of each of the right decorative pattern and the left decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
In the first effect, the left decorative pattern is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed larger than the right decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the second effect, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed with different orientations of their main surfaces.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4,
In the third effect, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed such that a portion of each protrudes from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

68 to 70, the winning type suggestive image display effects A to C will be described below. This hit type suggesting image display effect can be executed, for example, during the variation effect of the decorative symbols at the time of the rush. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the winning type suggesting image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hit type suggestion image display effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the winning type suggesting image display effect A. FIG. In the winning type suggestive image display effect A, first, the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 68(A) is executed. Specifically, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and a winning type suggestion image SH are displayed on the display screen 7a. The winning type suggesting image SH is an image that suggests the content of a series of winning games during the rush. In other words, the winning type suggestion image SH is an image that suggests the big winning type executed in the past. In FIG. 68(A), three kinds of jackpot types of "Super", "Miracle" and "Bonus" are displayed. Also, in FIG. 68(A), eight winning type suggestive images SH are displayed in two rows, suggesting that eight big winning games have been played in the past. In FIG. 68(A), the first to fifth jackpot types are displayed in the upper row, and the sixth to eighth jackpot types are displayed in the lower row. The winning type suggestive images SH are displayed in order from the left side to the right side near the center of the display screen 7a. The first movable role 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the winning type suggestion image SH is visible through the first movable role 14 .

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shift from the variable display to the stationary display as shown in the order of FIGS. 68(A) to 68(C). At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed overlapping part of the winning type suggestion image SH, as shown in FIGS. 68(A) to 68(C). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are partially overlapped with the winning type suggestion image SH during the variable display shown in FIG. 68A, and partially displayed during the stop display shown in FIG. It is displayed superimposed on the winning type suggestion image SH. After the decorative design stop display of FIG. 68(C), the decorative design variation effect is executed again as shown in FIG. 68(D). Also at this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping part of the winning type suggesting image SH.

[Hit type suggestive image display effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the winning type suggesting image display effect B. FIG. The winning type suggesting image display effect B differs from the winning type suggesting image display effect A in FIG. 68 in that the suggesting image IS1, the number of acquired balls image BA1, and the remaining period suggesting image are displayed. In the decorative design variation production shown in FIG. 69(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a hit type suggestive image SH, a suggestive image IS1, a winning ball image BA1, and a first image IM1. , a second image IM2 and a third image IM3 are displayed. The winning type suggesting image SH is the same as the winning type suggesting image display effect A in FIG. Here, nine winning type suggesting images SH are displayed side by side in two rows, suggesting that nine big winning games have been executed in the past. The suggestion image IS1 is an image that suggests the player to hit right. The acquired ball number image BA1 represents the number of balls acquired by the player in a series of winning games.

The first image IM1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smile. In addition, a specific object means everything that can be recognized as an independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. are also included. The first image IM1 is displayed over the second image IM2. Here, the first image IM1 is displayed on the left edge of the second image IM2. The second image IM2 is a substantially rectangular figure elongated in the horizontal direction, and is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A third image IM3 is a pending icon (a pending image) representing the number of pending orders, and is displayed on the second image IM2. A reservation number of 4 is suggested here.

The first image IM1 moves rightward on the second image IM2. The first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as remaining period suggestive images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires, depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. That is, it suggests that the predetermined period has expired when the first image IM1 is positioned at the right end of the second image IM2. A predetermined period is, for example, a period from the start to the end of one variation pattern.

The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a. A portion of each of the suggestive image IS1, the acquired ball number image BA1, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the winning type suggestive image SH is covered with the first movable accessory 14, and the first movable Visual recognition is possible through the accessory 14. - 特許庁

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shift from the variable display to the stationary display as shown in the order of FIGS. 69(A) to 69(C). At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed overlapping part of the winning type suggestion image SH, as shown in FIGS. 69(A) to 69(C). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are partially overlapped with the hit type suggestion image SH during the variable display shown in FIG. 69A, and partially displayed during the stop display shown in FIG. It is displayed superimposed on the winning type suggestion image SH. After the decorative symbol stop display of FIG. 69(C), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed again as shown in FIG. 69(D). Also at this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping part of the winning type suggesting image SH.

[Hit type suggestion image display effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the winning type suggestive image display effect C. FIG. The winning type suggesting image display effect C differs from the winning type suggesting image display effect A in FIG. 68 in that the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and the remaining period suggesting image are displayed. In the decorative design variation effect of FIG. 70(A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, the winning type suggestion image SH, the second decorative designs 8l, 8c, 8r, the first image IM1, A second image IM2 and a third image IM3 are displayed. The winning type suggesting image SH is the same as the winning type suggesting image display effect A in FIG. Here, three winning type suggesting images SH are displayed side by side in one row, suggesting that the big winning game has been executed three times in the past. Here, during the period from one time fluctuation display of the second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r to stop display, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R repeat the fluctuation display and the temporary stop display a plurality of times, and a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Do.

The first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the third image are the same as the winning type suggestive image display effect B in FIG. That is, the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as a remaining period suggestive image that suggests the remaining period until the predetermined period expires, depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. Here, it corresponds to the period from the one-time variable display of the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r to the stop display.

The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a. Part of each of the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the winning type suggestive image SH is covered with the first movable accessory 14, and the first movable role Visible through the object 14 .

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R execute a pseudo-continuous effect as shown in the order of FIGS. 70(A) to 70(D). At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed overlapping part of the winning type suggestion image SH, as shown in FIGS. 70(A) to 69(D). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are partially overlapped with the winning type suggestion image SH during the variable display shown in FIG. It is displayed superimposed on the winning type suggestion image SH.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the winning type suggestion image display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, in a state in which the winning type suggesting image SH suggesting the jackpot type executed in the past is displayed on the display screen 7a, the winning type suggesting image is displayed. It is possible to execute a first effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed overlapping part of the SH. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are hit, and the variable effect is started in a state in which at least a part overlaps with the type suggesting image SH. is executable. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the first effect, remaining period suggestive images IM1 and IM2 indicating the remaining period until the predetermined period expires are displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the first effect, a winning ball number image BA1 indicating the number of balls acquired by past big wins is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, at least a portion of the acquired ball number image BA1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the hit type suggestive image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The content of the winning type suggestion image SH shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 is not limited to the above, and can be any winning type. Also, the shape and arrangement of the winning type suggestion image SH are not limited to the above, and can be any shape and arrangement.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 is assumed to be in the first mode. However, the first movable accessory 14 may be in other forms. For example, the first movable accessory 14 may be stationary at the home position as a third mode and may be in a state where it is difficult to see, or may cover the entire display screen 7a as a second mode.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a winning type suggesting image that suggests a jackpot type executed in the past,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In a state where the winning type suggesting image is displayed on the display means, a first effect can be executed in which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping a part of the winning type suggesting image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
It is possible to execute a second effect in which a variable effect is started in a state where the decorative pattern overlaps at least a part of the winning type suggesting image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
In the first effect, a remaining period suggestion image indicating the remaining period until the predetermined period expires is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3,
In the first effect, a winning ball number image showing the number of balls won by past big wins is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-4 further comprises
Equipped with a transparent role,
At least part of the acquired ball number image is visible through the accessory,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The two-reach effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. This two-reach effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Two reach production A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the two-reach effect A. FIG.
First, in the two reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the first ready-to-win effect is executed. In this first ready-to-win performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and a ready-to-win state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates, and in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. It is a performance. In FIG. 71(B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the second ready-to-win effect is executed. In this second ready-to-win performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, forming a ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, and in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from right to left. It is a performance. In FIG. 71(C), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.
Note that FIGS. 71A to 71C show the same variation effects. Therefore, in the same variation, the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are executed, in other words, two different ready-to-reach effects are executed.

[Two reach production B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the two-reach effect B. FIG.
First, in the two-reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the first ready-to-win effect is executed. In this first ready-to-win performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and a ready-to-win state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates, and in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. It is a performance. In FIG. 72(B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at a pattern suggesting a pseudo-continuous run (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-continuous suggesting pattern).

The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects shown below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the second ready-to-win effect is executed. In this second ready-to-win performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, forming a ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, and in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from right to left. It is a performance. In FIG. 72(D), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.
It should be noted that FIGS. 72A to 72D show the same variations. Therefore, in the same variation, the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are executed, in other words, two different ready-to-reach effects are executed.

[Two reach production C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the two-reach effect C. FIG.
First, in the two-reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the first ready-to-win effect is executed. In this first ready-to-win performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and a ready-to-win state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates, and in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. It is a performance. In FIG. 73(B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at a pattern suggesting a pseudo-continuous run (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-continuous suggesting pattern).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the second ready-to-win effect is executed. In this second ready-to-win performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and a ready-to-win state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates, and in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern 8C moves upward from the bottom. It is a performance. In FIG. 73(D), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.
It should be noted that FIGS. 73A to 73D show the same variations. Therefore, in the same variation, the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are executed, in other words, two different ready-to-reach effects are executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the two-reach production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are performed with the same variation in the two-to-reach effect. According to this configuration, since two modes of ready-to-win effects are performed with the same variation, the interest in the game can be improved. .

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the two reach effect, the second reach effect is performed after the first reach effect. According to this configuration, since two ready-to-win effects are performed in order, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the two-reach effect, the decorative symbols fluctuate to the left in the first ready-to-reach effect, and the decorative symbols fluctuate to the right in the second ready-to-win effect. According to this configuration, in the two ready-to-win effects, the decorative symbols change in different directions, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the two-reach effect, the decorative symbols fluctuate to the left in the first ready-to-reach effect, and the decorative symbols fluctuate to the right in the second ready-to-win effect. According to this configuration, in the two ready-to-win effects, the decorative symbols change in opposite directions, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the two-reach production,
The fourth display effect is a effect of performing a pseudo-continuation,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the fourth display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the two-reach production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right in the first reach effect, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates in the second reach effect moves from right to left. , the configuration is such that two different ready-to-win effects are realized, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuating in the first reach production moves from right to left, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuating in the second reach production moves from left to right, so that two different reach productions are produced in the same fluctuation. It may be configured to be realized, and the decorative pattern 8C that fluctuates in the first reach production moves from bottom to top, and the decorative pattern 8C that fluctuates in the second reach production moves from top to bottom, In the same fluctuation, It is good also as a structure which implement|achieves two different ready-to-win effects. Also, in the first reach performance, the varying decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the stationary decorative symbols 8L, 8R, and in the second reach performance, the varying middle decorative pattern 8C moves behind the stationary decorative symbols 8L, 8R. By doing so, in the same variation, it may be configured to achieve two different ready-to-win effects.
Further, by making the decorative patterns 8L, 8R forming the ready-to-win state in the first ready-to-win effect different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8R to form the ready-to-win state in the second ready-to-win effect, in the same variation, It is good also as a structure which implement|achieves two different ready-to-win effects.
Further, the variable decorative pattern 8C is randomly moved in the first ready-to-win production, and the variable decorative pattern 8C in the second ready-to-win production is also randomly moved, so that two different ready-to-win productions are realized in the same fluctuation. good too.
The order of the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect may be reversed, and the first ready-to-win effect may be executed after the second ready-to-win effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of forming a reach state of the first mode using a decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of forming a ready-to-reach state of a second mode different from the first mode using the decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The reach state of the first aspect includes a stopped decorative pattern and a fluctuating decorative pattern, and is a mode in which the fluctuating decorative pattern moves in the first direction,
The ready-to-reach state of the second mode includes a stopped decorative pattern and a fluctuating decorative pattern, and the fluctuating decorative pattern moves in a second direction different from the first direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
the second direction is opposite to the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of performing a pseudo-continuation,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the fourth display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special symbol variation effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. This special symbol variation effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Special symbol variation effect A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect A. FIG.
First, in the special symbol variation effect A, as shown in FIG. 74(A), the first symbol variation effect is executed. In this first symbol variation performance, the variation performance is executed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R composed only of number symbols. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R composed only of the number patterns are also called normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), the first symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped by a pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol while the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped. The decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which the numbers of the numerical patterns are different by one.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the second symbol variation effect is executed. In this second pattern variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in which the character image D41 is added to the number pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in which the character image D41 is added to the numerical patterns are also called first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. In the first special decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, even if the number patterns are different, all the patterns are added with the perspective character image D41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the second symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped by a pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol while the first special decorative symbol 8L and the first special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The first special decorative pattern 8L and the first special decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which the number of the number pattern is different by one.
It should be noted that FIGS. 74A to 74D show the same variations.

[Special symbol variation effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect B. FIG.
First, in the special symbol variation performance B, as shown in FIG. 75(A), the first symbol variation performance is executed. In this first symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), the first symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped by a pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol while the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped. The decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which the numbers of the numerical patterns are different by one.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), the second symbol variation effect is executed. In this second pattern variation performance, the variation performance is executed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in which the name image D42 of the viewpoint character is added to the first special decoration pattern in which the viewpoint character image D41 is added to the number pattern. be done. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in which the name image D42 of the viewpoint character is added to the first special decorative patterns are also called second special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. The name image D42 in FIG. 75(C) is represented as "OARO". In the second special decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the name image D42 is added to all patterns even if the number patterns are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the second symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped by a pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol while the second special decorative symbol 8L and the second special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The second special decorative pattern 8L and the second special decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which the number of the number pattern is different by one.
It should be noted that FIGS. 75A to 75D are effects of the same variation.

[Special symbol variation effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect C. FIG.
First, in the special symbol variation effect C, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the first symbol variation effect is executed. In this first symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the third special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The third special decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are added with a number pattern and a character image, and the characters added are different for each number pattern. For example, a decorative pattern with a number design of 7 is added with a viewpoint character image D41, and a decorative pattern with a number design of 6 is added with an enemy character D43.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), the first symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped by a pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol while the third special decorative symbol 8L and the third special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which the numbers of the numerical patterns are different by one.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the second symbol variation effect is executed. In this second symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the fourth special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The fourth special decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are added with a number pattern, a character image and a name image, and the character and name image added for each number pattern are different. For example, a decorative design with a number design of 7 is added with a view character image D41 and a name image D42, and a decorative design with a number design of 6 is added with an enemy character D43 and a name image D44. The name image D44 is represented as "OORO".

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), the second symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped by a pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol while the fourth special decorative symbol 8L and the fourth special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The fourth special decorative pattern 8L and the fourth special decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which the number of the number pattern is different by one.
It should be noted that FIGS. 76A to 76D show the same variation effects.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the first symbol variation effect include one or more elements, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, In addition to the elements included in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the first pattern variation effect, 8R is configured to include new elements not found in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the first pattern variation effect. ing. According to this configuration, two variable performances are performed by decorative symbols having different elements, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second symbol variation effect is executed after the first symbol variation effect in the special symbol variation effect. According to this configuration, since the second symbol variation effect is performed after the first symbol variation effect, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first symbol variation effect and the second symbol variation effect are performed in the same variation in the special symbol variation effect. According to this configuration, since the first symbol variation effect and the second symbol variation effect are performed with the same variation, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect B, in the second symbol variation effect, the element included in the decorative pattern of the second symbol change effect in the special symbol change effect (viewpoint character image D41) is used, A predetermined effect is performed (Modification 3 described later). According to this configuration, since an effect is performed using the elements included in the decorative pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect, the variation effect is performed by the decorative symbols including the numerical symbols, the variable effect is performed by the decorative symbols including the numerical symbols and the appearance character image D41, and then the numerical symbols and the appearance are performed. A variation effect is performed by a decoration pattern including a character image D41 and a name image D42 of an ally character (Modification 1, which will be described later). According to this configuration, since three variable performances each having a different number of elements are performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect, the normal decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the second special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the third special decorative symbols Three or more of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the fourth special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be combined to achieve a variable effect within the same variation.
For example, within the same variation, the normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used for the production, then the first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used for the production, and then the second special decorative pattern is used. 8L, 8C, and 8R may be used to produce an effect.
Also, within the same variation, the normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used for production, then the third special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used for production, and then the fourth special decorative pattern is used. 8L, 8C, and 8R may be used to produce an effect.
Furthermore, within the same variation, the normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used to produce an effect, then the first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used to produce an effect, and then the second special decorative pattern is used. 8L, 8C, and 8R may be used to produce an effect, and then the third special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be used to produce an effect.
Also, the order of these productions may be rearranged. For example, within the same variation, effects are performed using the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, then the effects are performed using the first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and then the normal decorative patterns 8L. , 8C, and 8R may be used to produce an effect.
Also, the combination effects of these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may correspond to each mode. For example, in mode A, special symbol variation performance A may be performed, in mode B, special symbol variation performance B may be performed, and in mode C, special symbol variation performance C may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special symbol variation effect is performed within the same variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed separately for a plurality of variations. For example, in the special symbol variation performance A, FIGS. 74(A) and (B) may be performed within the same variation, and FIGS. 74(C) and (D) may be performed within the next variation.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the special symbol variation effects A to C, images including elements included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to perform predetermined effects (for example, ready-to-win effects, pseudo-continuous effects, chance-up effects, etc.). Production, look-ahead production, jackpot suggestion production) may be performed. For example, the chance-up effect may be performed using the perspective character images D41 included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the second symbol change effect of the special symbol change effect A. In this case, the chance-up effect using the viewpoint character image D41 may be performed after the second pattern variation effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a decorative pattern in a first mode,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying the decorative pattern in the second mode different from the first mode,
The decorative pattern of the first aspect includes one or more elements,
The decorative pattern of the second aspect includes, in addition to the elements included in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, new elements not found in the decorative pattern of the first aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect performed using an image including elements included in the decorative pattern of the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying the decorative pattern in a third mode different from the second mode,
The decorative pattern of the third aspect includes, in addition to the elements included in the decorative pattern of the second aspect, new elements not found in the decorative pattern of the second aspect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The suggestive effect other than losing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. This non-losing suggestion effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Suggestive production A other than failure]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the suggestion effect A other than failure.
First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), in the suggestive effect A other than losing, the variable effect is executed. This variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a losing pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This losing pattern arrangement stop effect is a performance of stopping the losing pattern arrangement representing a loss using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 77(B), 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, 6 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is used for the decorative pattern 8C as the missing pattern array. The losing pattern array including this special symbol suggests something other than losing. Specifically, the winning pattern arrangement including this special symbol suggests that a big win will be achieved by either holding, apart from losing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern arrangement stop production is a production to stop the jackpot pattern arrangement representing the jackpot by using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 77(D), as the jackpot pattern arrangement, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form 7 patterns.
Note that FIGS. 77A and 77B show effects related to the change, and FIGS. 77C and 77D show effects related to the next change. Figure 77 (C), (D) may be an effect related to the next next variation for the variation effect, or may be an effect related to the next next next change for the change, or the variation It can also be a production that depends on the next next next next next change. That is, after stopping the losing pattern arrangement including special symbols in FIG. 77(B), FIGS. In this case, a predetermined If there is a variation of , the lost pattern arrangement including the special symbol is stopped and displayed even in that variation.

[Suggestion production B other than failure]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining suggestion effect B other than failure.
First, in the suggestive effect B other than losing, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the variable effect is executed. In this variable effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are changed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, and various characters appear. It is a production that makes various displays. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are formed larger than the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a losing pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. In this losing pattern arrangement stopping effect, the losing pattern arrangement representing the losing is stopped using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. is used to stop the missing pattern arrangement. In FIG. 78(B), 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, and 6 patterns are used for the decorative patterns 8C and 8R as the missing pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In addition, as the missing pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R, 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 9L, 6 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 9R, and a special pattern is used for the decorative pattern 9C. The lost pattern arrangement by the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R including the special symbols suggests other than lost. Specifically, the winning pattern arrangement by the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R including the special symbols suggests that a big hit will be achieved by either holding, apart from losing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), the next variation effect is executed. In this next variation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are changed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, and various characters appear. It is a production that makes various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. In this jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect, the jackpot pattern arrangement representing the jackpot is stopped using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. is used to stop the jackpot pattern arrangement. In FIG. 78(D), as the jackpot pattern array, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are used to form 7 patterns.

Note that FIGS. 78A and 78B show effects related to the change, and FIGS. 78C and 78D show effects related to the next change. Figure 78 (C), (D) may be an effect related to the next next change for the change effect, or an effect related to the next next change for the change, or the change It may be a production that depends on the next next next next next change. That is, after stopping the losing pattern arrangement including special symbols in FIG. 78(B), FIGS. In this case, a predetermined If there is a variation of , the lost pattern arrangement including the special symbol is stopped and displayed even in that variation.

[Suggestion production C other than failure]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the hint effect C other than failure.
First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), in the suggestive effect C other than losing, the variable effect is executed. This variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a losing pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This losing pattern arrangement stop effect is a performance of stopping the losing pattern arrangement representing a loss using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 79(B), 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, 6 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is used for the decorative pattern 8C as the missing pattern array. The losing pattern array including this special symbol suggests something other than losing. Specifically, the losing pattern arrangement including this special symbol suggests that a pseudo-continuous effect will occur in either of the holdings, apart from the losing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped by the pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol in a state where the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped.
Incidentally, FIGS. 79A and 79B are effects related to the change, and FIGS. 79C and 79D are effects related to the next change. Figure 79 (C), (D) may be an effect related to the next next change for the change effect, or an effect related to the next next change for the change, or the change It can also be a production that depends on the next next next next next change. That is, after stopping the losing pattern arrangement including special symbols in FIG. 79(B), FIGS. In this case, a predetermined If there is a variation of , the lost pattern arrangement including the special symbol is stopped and displayed even in that variation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the suggestive effect other than losing will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the non-losing suggestive effect, the losing pattern arrangement stop effect is performed after the variable effect, and the losing pattern arrangement stopped and displayed in the losing pattern arrangement stop effect provides a predetermined suggestion other than the losing. Includes special symbols to do. According to this configuration, even if the losing pattern arrangement is stopped, a predetermined suggestion is made by the special pattern, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed when the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are variably displayed in the suggestive effect other than losing. According to this configuration, since the variable display is performed by the two decorative symbols, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the non-losing suggestive effect, the winning symbol arrangement including the special symbols includes a display suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold. According to this configuration, the losing pattern arrangement suggests that there is a big win in the hold, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the non-losing suggestion performance, after the variation performance, the winning pattern arrangement including the special pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the next variation is also stopped and displayed with the losing pattern arrangement including the special pattern. According to this configuration, since the predetermined suggestion by the special symbol is continued, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the non-losing suggestive effect B, after the losing pattern arrangement stop effect including the special pattern, the big win pattern arrangement stop effect is performed in the next variation, and the special pattern is performed in the big win pattern arrangement. is not included. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the suggestive effect other than failure will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the non-losing suggestion effects A to C, the losing pattern arrangement including the special pattern is a pseudo-continuous either of a suggestion of a big hit in any of the suspensions or a suspension as a suggestion of non-losing. Although it is suggested that a performance will occur, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the missing pattern arrangement including special symbols suggests that a specific reach production (for example, story reach production or premium reach production) will appear in any of the holds as a suggestion other than loss, or either hold may suggest that a specific character (for example, a premium character) will appear.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the non-losing suggestive effect B, a losing pattern arrangement including special symbols is formed only in the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, either one of the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, or both the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R include a special pattern. It is good also as a structure formed. In this case, when a missing pattern arrangement including a special pattern is formed in both the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, It may be a configuration suggesting that the player will be in a more advantageous state than when a lost symbol arrangement including a special symbol is formed in either one of the 8Rs. For example, when a losing pattern arrangement including special patterns is formed in both the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, it suggests that there are two or more jackpots in the reserve. You may do so.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the non-losing suggestive effects A to C, after stopping the losing pattern arrangement including the special symbol, if there is a predetermined fluctuation until the fluctuation with the big hit, in that fluctuation Also, the lost pattern arrangement including the special pattern is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lost pattern arrangement including the special pattern may not be stopped and displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of varying the decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of stopping the decorative pattern in a lost pattern arrangement, which is one aspect of a plurality of aspects,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and in the second display effect, the decorative pattern may be stopped in the first pattern arrangement. ,
The lost pattern arrangement of the first aspect includes a predetermined suggestive display other than lost,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of varying a decorative pattern larger than the decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed at the time of the first display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The losing pattern arrangement of the first aspect includes, as the predetermined suggestive display, a display suggesting that there is a hit on hold,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the combination effect, after the decorative symbols are stopped in the displaced pattern arrangement of the first mode, the first display effect is performed again in the next variation, and then the second display effect is performed. is performed, and in the second display effect, the predetermined suggestive display is stopped at the lost pattern arrangement of the first mode including a specific pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of stopping the decorative pattern in a jackpot pattern arrangement,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the decorative symbols are stopped in the layout of the missing symbols in the first mode, the first display effect is performed again in the next variation, and then the fourth display effect is performed. done,
A gaming machine, wherein the jackpot arrangement of the decorative symbols does not include the predetermined suggestive display.

The decorative symbol moving effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. This decorative symbol movement effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Decorative pattern moving effect A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect A. FIG.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect A, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a decorative symbol frontward moving ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-reach effect of moving the decorative pattern to the front, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating. In the ready-to-reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the stationary decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R as the decorative pattern 8C moves. In FIG. 80(B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol. The decorative design 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R, and stops between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R.
It should be noted that FIGS. 80A to 80C show the same variations.

[Decorative pattern moving effect B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect B. FIG.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect B, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a decorative symbol forward moving ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-reach effect of moving the decorative pattern to the front, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating. In the ready-to-reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the stationary decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R as the decorative pattern 8C moves. In FIG. 81(B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a decorative symbol rearward moving ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-reach effect of moving the decorative design backward, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R are stopped at the same design, and a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating. In the ready-to-reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves behind the stationary decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R as the decorative pattern 8C moves. In FIG. 81(C), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.
It should be noted that after the decorative symbol rearward movement ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 81(C), the decorative symbol forward moving ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 81(B) may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol. The decorative design 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R, and stops between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R.
Note that FIGS. 81A to 81D show the same variation effects.

[Decorative pattern moving effect C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect C. FIG.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect C, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a decorative symbol forward moving ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-reach effect of moving the decorative pattern to the front, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating. In the ready-to-reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the stationary decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R as the decorative pattern 8C moves. In FIG. 82(B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a decorative symbol rearward moving ready-to-win effect is executed. In this decorative design rearward moving ready-to-win performance, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R are stopped at the same design, and a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating. In the ready-to-reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from right to left. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves behind the stationary decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R as the decorative pattern 8C moves. In FIG. 82(C), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol. The decorative design 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R, and stops between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R.
It should be noted that FIGS. 82A to 82D show the same variations.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol movement production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect, after the variation start effect, the decorative symbol forward movement ready-to-reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, since the decorative pattern moves so as to pass in front of other decorative patterns, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern 8C is passed in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in a state where the reach state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern 8C moves so as to pass in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect, the moving direction of the decorative symbol 8C in the variable start effect is the downward direction, and the moving direction of the decorative symbol 8C in the decorative symbol forward movement ready-to-reach effect is the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the decorative symbols, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect B, the decorative symbol frontward movement ready-to-reach effect is performed, and thereafter the decorative symbol backward movement ready-to-reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the decorative symbols and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect, after the decorative symbol forward moving ready-to-win effect, a pseudo continuous effect is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed adjacent to the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the decorative symbol movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effects A to C, the decorative symbol 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. Although it is configured to be stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8C may be configured to be separated from the decorative patterns 8L and 8R and stopped.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol moving effects A to C, the decorative symbol forward moving ready-to-win effect is when the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol), the decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Although it is configured to move in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at different patterns, the decorative pattern 8C may move in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effects A to C, the decorative symbol frontward movement reach effect is such that when the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are in a stopped state, the decorative symbol 8C moves to the decorative symbol 8L. Although it is configured to move in front of the decorative pattern 8R, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are moving, the decorative pattern 8C may move in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of variably displaying a plurality of decorative symbols including a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol,
The second display effect is a effect in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and the second decorative pattern is moved so as to pass in front of the first decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the second display effect, the second decorative pattern is moved to pass in front of the first decorative pattern in a state where the reach state is formed by the decorative patterns including the first decorative pattern. is a performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the first display effect, the variation direction of the second decorative pattern is the first direction,
In the second display effect, the movement direction of the second decorative pattern is a second direction different from the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and the second decorative pattern is moved so as to pass behind the first decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, either the second display effect or the third display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the other display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of stopping the second decorative pattern adjacent to the first decorative pattern in the stopped state,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special pseudo continuous effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. This special pseudo continuous effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Special Pseudo Continuous Performance A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo continuous effect A. FIG.
First, in the special pseudo continuous effect A, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the first pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72. The pseudo-run suggesting pattern D72 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-run and a ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71. The ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 represents an ally character, and in other words, suggests that the ready-to-win effect will develop in which the friendly character appears. That is, the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of ready-to-win effect that will develop in the future. Also, the ready-to-win effect suggestive image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo-run suggestive symbol D72. The ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 is represented in a color based on blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the second pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72A. The pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72A shows only the NEXT image.

[Special Simulated Continuous Performance B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo continuous effect B. FIG.
First, in the special pseudo continuous effect B, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the first pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72. The pseudo-run suggesting pattern D72 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-run and a ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71. The ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 represents an ally character, and in other words, suggests that the ready-to-win effect will develop in which the friendly character appears. That is, the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of ready-to-win effect that will develop in the future. Also, the ready-to-win effect suggestive image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo-run suggestive symbol D72. The ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 is represented in a color based on blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), the second pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D73 while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-run suggestive pattern D73 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-run and a ready-to-win effect suggestive image D74. The ready-to-win effect suggestion image D74 represents an enemy character, and in other words, suggests that the ready-to-reach effect will develop in which the enemy character appears. That is, the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D74 represents the type of ready-to-win effect that will develop in the future. Also, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 is used as a background image of the pseudo-run suggesting symbol D72. The ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 is represented in a color based on red. The ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 suggests development of a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation for a big win compared to the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71. In other words, the color (red) of the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than the color (blue) of the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71.

[Special Pseudo Continuous Performance C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo-continuous effect C. FIG.
First, in the special pseudo continuous effect C, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), the first ready-to-win announcement effect is executed. The first ready-to-win announcement effect is an effect in which a ready-to-win announcement image D75 is displayed. The ready-to-win preview image D75 foreshadows a ready-to-win effect that will develop in the future. A reach notice image D75 shown in FIG. 85(B) suggests, as a reach notice, development of an OARO reach in which an ally character appears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), the first pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72. The pseudo-run suggesting pattern D72 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-run and a ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71. The ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 represents an ally character, and in other words, suggests that the ready-to-win effect will develop in which the friendly character appears. That is, the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of ready-to-win effect that will develop in the future. This ready-to-win effect suggestive image D71 is linked with the ready-to-win preview image D75, and both suggest that the game will develop into an OARO ready-to-win game in which an ally character appears. Also, the ready-to-win effect suggestive image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo-run suggestive symbol D72. The ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 is represented in a color based on blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), the second ready-to-win announcement effect is executed. The second ready-to-win announcement effect is an effect in which a ready-to-win announcement image D76 is displayed. The ready-to-win preview image D76 foreshadows a ready-to-win effect that will develop in the future. A reach notice image D76 shown in FIG. 85(D) suggests as a reach notice that the game will develop into an OORO reach in which an enemy character appears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), the second pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D73 while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-run suggestive pattern D73 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-run and a ready-to-win effect suggestive image D74. The ready-to-win effect suggestion image D74 represents an enemy character, and in other words, suggests that the ready-to-reach effect will develop in which the enemy character appears. That is, the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D74 represents the type of ready-to-win effect that will develop in the future. This ready-to-win effect suggestive image D74 is linked with the ready-to-win preview image D76, and both suggest that the game will develop into an OORO ready-to-win where an enemy character appears. Also, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 is used as a background image of the pseudo-run suggesting symbol D72. The ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 is represented in a color based on red.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special pseudo-continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect, the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and in the first pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72 suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol is displayed. A ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 is displayed in D72 to suggest a different effect from the pseudo-continuous effect. According to this configuration, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 that suggests a different effect from the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed in the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect B, after the first pseudo-continuous effect, the second pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and in the second pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect D73 is displayed, and a ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 that suggests a different effect from the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed in the pseudo-continuous suggesting pattern D73. According to this configuration, in addition to the first pseudo-continuous effect, the second pseudo-continuous effect also displays the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 suggesting a different suggestion from the pseudo-continuous effect in the pseudo-continuous suggesting pattern D73, thereby improving the game. Interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 used in the first pseudo-continuous effect and the second pseudo-continuous effect are images suggesting the type of the ready-to-win effect. is. According to this configuration, the player can know the type of ready-to-win effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect, the ready-to-reach effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 used in the first pseudo-continuous effect and the second pseudo-continuous effect are pseudo-continuous effects. This is the background image of the suggestive symbol D72 and the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D73. According to this configuration, since the player can know the type of ready-to-win effect from the background image, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 used in the first pseudo-continuous effect and the second pseudo-continuous effect are character images. According to this configuration, the player can easily know the type of ready-to-win effect from the character image, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the special pseudo continuous effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect A, the ready-to-reach effect suggesting image D71 is displayed as the background image of the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72 in the first pseudo-continuous effect, and in the second pseudo-continuous effect, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 is displayed. Although the pseudo-run suggesting pattern D72A that does not include the image D71 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a third pseudo-continuous effect, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 is displayed as the background image of the pseudo-continuous suggesting pattern D72 in the second pseudo-continuous effect, and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 is included in the third pseudo-continuous effect. A pseudo-run suggestive symbol D72A may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effects A to C, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 displayed in the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72 and the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D73 are the specific ready-to-win effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pseudo-continue suggestive symbol D72 or the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D73, a chance-up suggestive image suggesting a chance-up may be displayed, a big win suggestive image suggesting a big win may be displayed, or a look-ahead effect may be displayed. You may make it display the look-ahead effect suggestion image which suggests.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 are displayed as background images of the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D72 and the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol D73 in the special pseudo-continuous effects A to C. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 may be displayed as part of the pseudo-continue suggesting symbol D72 and the pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol D73, and the ready-to-reach effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 may be displayed as pseudo It may be displayed in front of the consecutive suggesting pattern D72 or the pseudo consecutive suggesting pattern D73, and the NEXT image may be in the background.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D71 and the ready-to-win effect suggesting image D74 are character images in the special pseudo-continuous effects A to C, but the present invention is not limited to this. or other images such as landscape images.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect for performing a first pseudo-continuous effect,
the second display effect is an effect for performing a second pseudo-continuous effect different from the first pseudo-continuous effect;
The first pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of displaying a first pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and in the first display effect, an effect different from the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed in the first pseudo-continuous suggestive image. A first specific suggestive image that suggests may be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of displaying a second pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect,
In the combined effect, in the second display display, a second specific suggestive image that suggests a different effect than the pseudo-continuous effect may be displayed within the second pseudo-continuous suggestive image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The specific suggestion image is an image that suggests the type of reach production,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The specific suggestive image is a background image of the pseudo-continuous suggestive image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The specific suggestion image is a character image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

86 to 88, normal pseudo-continuation effects and pseudo-continuation suggestive image use effects A and B will be described below. This pending effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Normal pseudo-continuous effect]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the normal pseudo continuous effect.
First, in the normal pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the first pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol. This pseudo-continuation suggesting pattern includes a NEXT image D81 suggesting a pseudo-continuation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the second pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol. This pseudo-continuation suggesting pattern includes a NEXT image D81 suggesting a pseudo-continuation effect.
It should be noted that FIGS. 86A to 86C are effects with the same variation.

[Production A using pseudo-continue suggestive image]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining pseudo-rep suggestive image usage effect A. FIG.
First, in pseudo-continue suggestive image use effect A, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a jackpot suggestion effect is executed. In this jackpot suggestion effect, the NEXT image D81 used in the normal pseudo continuous effect is displayed. This NEXT image D81 functions as an image suggesting a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and causes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern arrangement stop production is a production to stop the jackpot pattern arrangement representing the jackpot by using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 87(D), as the jackpot pattern array, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form 7 patterns.
It should be noted that FIGS. 87A to 87D are effects with the same variation.

[Performance B using Pseudo-continue Suggestion Image]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining pseudo-rep suggestive image usage effect B. FIG.
First, in pseudo-continue suggestive image usage effect B, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a jackpot suggestion effect is executed. In this jackpot suggestion effect, the NEXT image D81 used in the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed, and the second movable accessory 15 moves to the second mode (see FIG. 48). This NEXT image D81 functions as an image suggesting a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and causes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern arrangement stop production is a production to stop the jackpot pattern arrangement representing the jackpot by using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 88(D), as the jackpot pattern array, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form 7 patterns.
Note that FIGS. 88A to 88D are effects with the same variation.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of the normal pseudo-continuation effect and pseudo-continuation suggestive image use effect are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect using the NEXT image D81 is performed in the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the big win suggestive effect is performed using the NEXT image D81 in the pseudo-continuous suggestive image usage effect. According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 can have various effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to execute the accessory presentation while performing the big win suggestion presentation using the NEXT image D81 in the pseudo-ream suggestive image use presentation B. I'm trying According to this configuration, the effect of the NEXT image D81 suggesting a big win can be emphasized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect of using the pseudo-continue suggestive image is performed in the variation immediately after the jackpot game ends. According to this configuration, the appearance of the NEXT image D81 can further emphasize the suggestion of a big win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used in the big win suggestive effect suggesting a big win in the pseudo-continuous suggestive image use effect. According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 is used in a big win suggestive effect that suggests a big win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used in a suggestive effect that suggests a game state in the pseudo-continuous suggestive image use effect (Modification 1). According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 is used in a suggestive effect that suggests the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the normal pseudo-continuation effect and pseudo-continuation suggestive image use effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used as a jackpot suggestion in the pseudo-continue suggestive image usage effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the NEXT image D81 may be used to suggest a chance-up effect, to suggest a look-ahead effect, or to suggest a game state. In this case, if the NEXT image D81 suggests a chance-up effect, then the chance-up effect is performed. Further, when the NEXT image D81 suggests a look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect is performed thereafter. Further, when the NEXT image D81 suggests a game state, the game state is reported after that.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used as a jackpot suggestion in the pseudo-continue suggestive image usage effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the NEXT image D81 may be used as a chance-up effect, as a look-ahead effect, or as a game state notification.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo-continue suggestive image usage effect may be performed in the variation immediately after the end of the jackpot game (first rotation after the end of the jackpot game), or may be performed during time saving. Alternatively, it may be performed during a jackpot game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D8-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is a effect of performing a pseudo-continuous effect using a specific image;
The second display effect is a effect for performing a predetermined effect,
The predetermined effect is a effect using the specific image,
The specific image is an image suggesting at least a pseudo-continuous effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect in which a character effect using a predetermined character is performed,
A combination effect including the second display effect and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The predetermined effect is performed in the fluctuation immediately after the end of the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The predetermined production is a jackpot suggestion production that suggests a jackpot,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D8-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The predetermined suggestive effect is a game state suggestive effect that suggests a game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The full rotation presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. FIG. This full rotation effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Full rotation effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the full rotation effect A. FIG.
First, in the full rotation effect A, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and causes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a scroll effect is executed. In this scroll effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R disappear and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R scroll downward in the same pattern state (in a grid state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop production is a production for displaying a jackpot pattern array representing a big win by stopping the scrolling decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R. In FIG. 89(D), as the jackpot pattern arrangement, decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R are used to form 7 patterns. Note that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of disappearing even in the jackpot symbol stop effect.

Note that FIGS. 89A to 89D show effects with the same variation. Also, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are the same in the variation start effect, the ready-to-win effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect.

[Full rotation effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the full rotation effect B. FIG.
First, in the full rotation effect B, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and causes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a scroll effect is executed. In this scroll effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R disappear and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R scroll downward in the same pattern state (in a grid state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop production is a production of displaying a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C and 9R by stopping the scrolling decorative patterns 9L, 9C and 9R. In addition, in this jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are also stop-displayed forming a jackpot pattern arrangement. In FIG. 90(D), as the jackpot pattern arrangement, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are used to form 7 patterns.

It should be noted that FIGS. 90A to 90D are effects with the same variation. Also, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are the same in the variation start effect, the ready-to-win effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect.

[Full rotation production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the full rotation effect C. FIG.
First, in the full rotation effect C, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variable start effect is executed. This fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and causes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the first scroll effect is executed. In this first scroll effect, the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R are scrolled downward in the same pattern state (square pattern state), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the same pattern state (or zigzag state). It is a production that scrolls downward in the state of the eyes). The arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R may be synchronized and scrolled, or may be scrolled without synchronization.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), the second scroll effect is executed. In this second scroll effect, the decorative patterns 9L, 9C and 9R are scrolled in the same manner as in the first scroll effect, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are scrolled in a state larger than the first scroll effect. be. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be scrolled while being smaller than the first scroll effect. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R may be scrolled in synchronization with each other, or may be scrolled without synchronization.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. In this jackpot pattern array stop performance, the scrolling decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are stopped to display the jackpot pattern array representing the jackpot using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R, and the scrolling decorative patterns 8L, 9R are displayed. By stopping 8C and 8R, the effect is to display a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 91(D), as the jackpot pattern arrangement, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are used to form 7 patterns.

Note that FIGS. 91A to 91D show effects with the same variation. Also, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are the same in the variation start effect, the ready-to-win effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the variation start effect is performed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R in the full rotation effect, and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R are used as the jackpot patterns. It is configured to perform a scrolling effect that scrolls in an array state. According to this configuration, the scroll performance is executed using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R which are smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, so that the player can be surprised and the amusement of the game can be improved. can be done.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are not displayed while the decorative patterns 9L, 9C and 9R are being scrolled in the full rotation effects A and B. . According to this configuration, since the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R can be noticed, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot pattern array is stopped and displayed using both the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the jackpot pattern stop processing in the full rotation productions B and C. I have to. According to this configuration, it is possible to firmly emphasize the big win to the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R do not change during the full rotation effect. According to this configuration, attention can be drawn to game effects other than the scroll effect, and interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the all-rotation effect C, the sizes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed from the first scroll effect to the second scroll effect. According to this configuration, the amusement of the game can be improved by the intonation of the decorative symbols.

[Modification]
A modification of the production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variable start effect, the ready-to-win effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect are the same in all rotation effects A to C. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be different, or may be different only in part of the presentation. For example, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R in the variable start effect and ready-to-win effect may be different from the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R in the scroll effect and the jackpot symbol stop effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are configured to disappear during the scrolling effect in the full rotation effects A, B, but the present invention is not limited to this. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may disappear for a moment during the scroll effect. Also, during the scroll effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be continuously displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D9-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect for performing an effect of varying the first decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of varying a second decorative design smaller than the first decorative design,
The third display effect is a effect of performing a full rotation effect in which the second decorative symbols are scrolled in a jackpot pattern arrangement,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, a third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a non-display effect in which the first decorative pattern is not displayed,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D9-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is to stop display the jackpot pattern array using the first decorative pattern, and further stop display the jackpot pattern array using the second decorative pattern,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D9-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The size of the second decorative pattern in the second display effect and the size of the second decorative pattern in the third display effect do not change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D9-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect in which the size of the first decorative pattern changes,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The countdown variation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. This countdown variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the countdown variable performance is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is a display effect to be displayed on.

[Countdown variation effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect A. FIG. In the countdown variation effect A, first, the countdown display of FIG. 92(A) is executed. Specifically, first, the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Numerical image IN1 is a numerical value of a specific value, which is represented here in Roman letters. Although the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters here, it may be written in other ways. Also, here, 4 is shown as the numerical value, but this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward direction variation effect shown in FIG. 92(B) is executed. Specifically, after displaying the numerical image IN1, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward and start moving in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C has already been variably displayed.

Next, the effect before stopping the right decorative symbol shown in FIG. 92(C) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed and the middle decorative design 8C is being variably displayed, the movement of the right decorative design 8R slows down. Then, after decelerating to such an extent that the player thinks that the right decorative symbol 8R of the same numerical value (here, "6") as the number (here, "6") stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol 8L will be stopped and displayed, FIG. The right decorative symbol slide stop display shown in is executed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R having the same numeric value (here, "6") stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L is not stop-displayed, and the next numeric value (here, "5") is stopped-displayed. be done.

Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 92(E) is executed. Specifically, the display screen 7a displays a numerical image IN2 having numerical values decremented (subtracted) by one from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 92(A). Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image representing 3, and is written in romaji like the numerical image IN1.

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 92(F) is executed. Specifically, after displaying the numerical image IN2, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move upward and start to move in opposite directions appearing from below the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C has already been variably displayed.

Next, the effect before stopping the left and right decorative symbols shown in FIG. 92(G) is executed. Specifically, while the middle decorative pattern 8C is being variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in parallel. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same numerical value (here, "6"). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed, so that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 92(H) is executed.

[Countdown variation effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect B. FIG. The countdown variation effect B differs from the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92 in the aspect of the numerical image IN1. In the countdown display of FIG. 93(A), a numerical image IN1 surrounded by a frame is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, 1 is shown as the numerical value, but this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward direction variation effect shown in FIG. 93(B) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each move downward and start moving in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a.

93(C), and the right decorative symbol slide stop display of FIG. 93(D) are different from the countdown variation effect A of FIG. It is the same.

Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 93(E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical image IN2 whose numerical value is decremented (subtracted) by one from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 93A is displayed surrounded by a frame on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image representing 0 (zero).

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 93(F) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each move upward and start moving in the opposite direction appearing from below the display screen 7a.

The effect before the left and right decorative symbols stop in FIG. 93(G) and the ready-to-win effect in FIG. 93(H) are the same as the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 92 except that the display of the numerical image IN2 is continued.

[Countdown variation effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect C. FIG. Countdown change effect C is compared with countdown change effect A of FIG. 92, and countdown change effect B is compared with countdown change effect A of FIG. The difference is that In the countdown display of FIG. 94A, a translucent numerical image IN1 and a specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters, but may be written in other ways. The numeric value can be any value. The specific image IMC is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smile. In addition, a specific object means everything that can be recognized as an independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. are also included. The specific image IMC is displayed overlapping the translucent numerical image IN1. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward direction variation effect shown in FIG. 94(B) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward and appear from above the display screen 7a in the forward direction. to start changing.

The effect before stopping the right decorative design in FIG. 94(C) and the right decorative design sliding stop display in FIG. 94(D) are the countdown of FIG. It is the same as the variable production A.

Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 94(E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical image IN2 having numerical values decremented (subtracted) by one from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 94A and a specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. . Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image showing 3 in Roman letters, and is displayed translucent like the numerical image IN1. The specific image IMC is displayed overlapping the translucent numerical image IN2.

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 94(F) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move upward and appear from below the display screen 7a in the opposite direction. to start changing.

94(G) left and right decorative pattern stop before production and FIG. 94(H) ready-to-win production are similar to the countdown fluctuation production A of FIG. It is the same.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the countdown variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, a first effect in which the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. A second effect in which is variably displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the second effect, the third effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed, and after the third effect , and a fourth effect in which a numerical image IN2 decremented by one from the numerical image IN2 displayed in the first effect is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the fourth effect, reverse variation display is performed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the direction opposite to the variation display. A fifth effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, the ready-to-win effect by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not executed in the third effect, and after the fifth effect, the decorative symbol 8L is executed. , 8C and 8R execute the ready-to-win effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the fifth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move upward from downward. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the above-described countdown variation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the countdown display, the forward direction fluctuation effect is started. However, after the countdown display, other effects may be executed before the forward fluctuation effect. For example, a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped may be displayed. The same applies between the countdown display and the reverse direction variation effect. Also, the countdown variable effect may include a part of each effect shown in FIGS. 92-94. For example, the countdown variation effect may not include the right decorative symbol slide stop effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the forward-direction variation effect is such that the decorative symbols move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. However, the forward direction fluctuation effect may be a change mode effect other than this. For example, the forward direction variation effect may be an effect in which the decorative pattern moves from left to right on the display screen 7a. The same applies to the reverse direction variation effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above countdown variation effect, the countdown display was performed twice (for example, FIG. 92(A) and FIG. 92(E)). However, the number of countdown displays can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the countdown variable effect A, FIGS. 92(A) to 92(D) may be repeated multiple times, and then FIGS. 92(E) to 92(H) may be executed. At this time, the numerical image IN1 is sequentially decremented by one.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D10-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a numerical image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the numerical image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇Aspect D10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-1,
a third effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the second effect;
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which a numerical image decremented by one from the numerical image displayed in the first effect is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇Aspect D10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-2,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which a reverse variable display is performed in which the decorative pattern moves in a direction opposite to the variable display,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-3,
In the third production, the reach production by the decorative pattern is not executed,
After the fifth effect, a reach effect is executed by the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇Aspect D10-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-3 or aspect D10-4,
In the fifth effect, the decorative pattern moves upward from the downward direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation section image superimposition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. FIG. This operation section image superimposition effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation unit image superimposition effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image superimposition effect A. FIG. In the operation unit image superimposition effect A, first, the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 95(A) is executed. Specifically, first, an operation section image BI1, a first specific image IC1, and a character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation unit image BI1 is an image representing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and represents the appearance of the effect button 63 here. It should be noted that the operation unit image BI1 may represent the appearance of operation means other than the effect button 63 as long as the operation means is included in the game machine 1 . The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smile. In addition, a specific object means everything that can be recognized as an independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. are also included. The operation section image BI1 is displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the first specific image IC1. The character image IW1 represents characters related to the operation method of the operation unit image BI1. Here, "Press!" is displayed as characters related to the operation method of the effect button 63 represented by the operation portion image BI1. When the operation portion image BI1 represents the effect button 63, the character image related to the operation method can also be exemplified by "continuous hits" and "PUSH". The character image IW1 is displayed overlapping the first specific image IC1.

Next, the specific image corresponding moving effect shown in FIG. 95(B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation portion image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. This is because the operation direction of the effect button 63 represented by the operation portion image BI1 is the vertical direction. For example, when the first specific image IC1 represents the steering wheel 60, the first specific image IC1 rotates left and right.

Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95(C) is executed. Specifically, the second specific image IC2 is displayed instead of the first specific image IC1. The second specific image IC2 is an image representing the same specific object as the first specific image IC1, and is larger in size than the first specific image IC1. That is, in the specific image enlarging effect, an effect is performed in which an image representing a specific object (here, a smile) is enlarged by switching from the first specific image IC1 to the second specific image IC2. As with the first specific image IC1, a portion of the lower side of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation section image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed and is displayed overlapping the second specific image IC2.

Next, the specific image corresponding moving effect shown in FIG. 95(D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first specific image IC1, the second specific image IC2 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation section image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95D, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction.

Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95(E) is executed. Specifically, the third specific image IC3 is displayed instead of the second specific image IC2. The third specific image IC3 is an image representing the same specific object as the second specific image IC2, and is larger in size than the second specific image IC2. 95(C) and 95(E), the first specific image IC1 is switched to the second specific image IC2, and furthermore, the second specific image IC1 is switched to the third specific image IC2. As a result, an effect is produced in which an image representing a specific object (here, a smile) gradually becomes larger. Similar to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, a portion of the lower side of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation section image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed, and is displayed overlapping the third specific image IC3.

Next, the specific image corresponding moving effect shown in FIG. 95(F) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, the third specific image IC3 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation portion image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95F, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction. An effect of switching to the vibrating third specific image IC3 is performed.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining operation unit image superimposition effect B. FIG. Operation unit image superimposition effect B differs from operation unit image superimposition effect A in FIG. 95 in the mode of change of the specific image. In the specific image/operation section image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 96A, a first operation section image BI1, a first specific image IC1, and a first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Points other than the character contents of the first character image IW1 are the same as those of the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect of FIG. 95(A).

Next, the enlarging/corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96(B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 gradually enlarges and moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation section image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. This is because the operation direction of the effect button 63 represented by the first operation portion image BI1 is the vertical direction. Further, a gigantic/corresponding movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 96(C). Specifically, the first specific image IC1 further gradually enlarges and moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation section image BI1.

Next, the specific image/operation section image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 96(D) is executed. Specifically, a second operation section image AS1, a fourth specific image IC4, and a second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second operation unit image AS1 is an image representing the appearance of the operation means provided in the game machine 1, and here represents the appearance of the sword member 64 including the sword button 65. As shown in FIG. The fourth specific image IC4 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents a smile shape different from that of the first specific image IC1. The second operation section image AS1 is displayed so as to cover part of the fourth specific image IC4. The second character image IW2 represents characters related to the operation method of the second operation section image AS1. Here, "push!" is displayed as characters related to the operation method of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation portion image AS1. The second character image IW2 is displayed overlapping the fourth specific image IC4.

Next, the enlarging/corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96(E) is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 gradually enlarges and moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation section image AS1. Here, the fourth specific image IC4 moves vertically. This is because the operation direction of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation portion image AS1 is the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the enlarging/corresponding movement effect is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation section image AS1 while gradually increasing in size.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image superimposition effect C. FIG. In the operation portion image superimposition effect C, first, the specific image/operation portion image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 97A is executed. Specifically, an operation section image BI1, a specific image IC1, and a first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Except for the fact that the specific image IC1 does not move up and down, it is the same as the specific image/operation section image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 95(A).

Next, the specific image visibility difficulty rendering shown in FIG. 97(B) is executed. Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 63, the specific image IC1 explodes and disappears, making the specific image IC1 difficult to see. At this time, an operation portion image BI1 and a second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second character image IW2 is a character suggesting that an operation by the player has been detected, and is displayed here as "yay!". Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the effect of making the operation section image difficult to see is executed. Specifically, the operation section image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image IC1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the specific image change effect shown in FIG. 97(D) is executed. Specifically, the aspect of the specific image IC1 changes. A change in mode is, for example, a change in color or shape. Here, the color of the specific image IC1 changes from the first color to the second color. Note that the color change of the specific image IC1 may alternately repeat the first color and the second color.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image superimposition effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, when the first specific image IC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the operation unit image is displayed so as to cover at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. A first effect in which BI1 is displayed and a second effect in which a second specific image IC2 larger than the first specific image IC1 is displayed after the first effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, after the second effect, a third effect in which a third specific image IC3 larger than the second specific image IC2 is displayed can be executed. is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the second effect, at least part of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation section image BI1. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the third effect, at least part of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation portion image BI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, the first specific image IC1 moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating portion image BI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, an image related to the operating method of the operating portion image BI1 is displayed in at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the operation section image superimposition effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation portion image superimposition effect A of FIG. 95, the operation portion image BI1 covers at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. However, the operation section image BI1 may cover the entire first specific image IC1. Further, the operation section image BI1 covers part of each of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3. However, the operation section image BI1 does not have to cover at least one of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3.

[Modification 2]
The operation unit image superimposed effects A to C shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 are examples of a part, and a part of the series of effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 may not be provided. Also, other effects may be included between the series of effects shown in FIGS. For example, in the operation section image superimposition effect A of FIG. 95, the specific image enlarging effect is performed twice, but it may be performed once, or may be performed three times or more.

[Modification 3]
Operation section image superimposition effects A to C shown in FIGS. Alternatively, other images may be displayed as well. For example, in the operation unit image superimposition effect A of FIG. 95, the character image IW1 may not be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target;
a first effect in which the operation means image is displayed so as to cover at least a portion of the first specific image in a state where the first specific image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the second specific image larger than the first specific image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the third specific image larger than the second specific image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2,
In the second effect, at least part of the second specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the third effect, at least part of the third specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the first effect, the first specific image moves in a direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
In the first effect, an image related to the operation method of the operation means is displayed in at least part of the first specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The character appearance effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. This character appearance effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Character appearance effect A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect A. FIG.
First, in the character appearance effect A, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced to start fluctuation. Also, this variable start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 98(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance effect is a state in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the smiley character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the first character appearance effect, the smiley character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a, but it may appear in a part of the edge of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a second character appearance effect is executed. This second character appearance effect is an effect in which the smiling character E21 proliferates from the state of the first character appearance effect to the vicinity of the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 proliferates (moves) toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiley character E21 grows (moves) toward a predetermined spot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change effect is a effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and is an effect of displaying a mode B image E22. The mode B image E22 is an image suggesting mode B.
It should be noted that FIGS. 98A to 98D show the same variation effects.

[Character Appearance Effect B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect B. FIG.
First, in the character appearance effect B, a variable start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(A). In this fluctuation start production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced to start fluctuation. Also, this variable start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 99(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance effect is a state in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the smiley character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the first character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill the edge portion of the display screen 7a, but may appear in a part of the edge portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a second character appearance effect is executed. In this second character appearance effect, the smiley character E21 further proliferates from the state of the first character appearance effect to the vicinity of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and finally, the smiley character E21 fills the display screen 7a and becomes the decorative pattern. The effect is that 8L, 8C, and 8R become invisible.

In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 proliferates (moves) toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiley character E21 grows (moves) toward a predetermined spot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change effect is a effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and is an effect of displaying a mode B image E22. The mode B image E22 is an image suggesting mode B.
It should be noted that FIGS. 99A to 99D show the same variation effects.

[Character Appearance Effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect C. FIG.
First, in the character appearance effect C, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced to start fluctuation. Also, this variable start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 100(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance effect is a state in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the smiley character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a. In this case, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R include the number design and the smiling design E23. The smiling pattern E23 is the same image as the smiling character E21. Incidentally, the smiley symbol E23 may be partially the same as the smiley character E21. Also, part of the smiley pattern E23 and part of the smiley character E21 may be the same.

In addition, in the first character appearance effect, the smiley character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a, but it may appear in a part of the edge of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a second character appearance effect is executed. In this second character appearance effect, the smiley character E21 further proliferates from the state of the first character appearance effect to the vicinity of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and finally, the smiley character E21 fills the display screen 7a and becomes the decorative pattern. The effect is that 8L, 8C, and 8R become invisible.

In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 proliferates (moves) toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiley character E21 grows (moves) toward a predetermined spot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change effect is a effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and is an effect of displaying a mode B image E22. The mode B image E22 is an image suggesting mode B.
Note that FIGS. 100A to 100D are effects of the same variation.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect, a first character appearance effect in which the smiling character E21 appears is performed, and then a second character appearance in which more smiling characters E21 appear than in the first character appearance effect is performed. An effect is performed, and then a mode change effect is performed. According to this configuration, an increase in the number of smiley characters E21 raises expectations for the transition to the mode change effect, and there is a case where the transition to the mode change effect is made, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second character appearance effect of the character appearance effect includes an effect in which the smiley character E21 moves toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. According to this configuration, the smiley character E21 moves toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects B and C, the smiling character E21 completely covers the display screen 7a in the second character appearance effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to give an impact to the player and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect C, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R having the same smiley pattern E23 as the smiley character E21 fluctuate in the first character appearance effect. According to this configuration, the smiley character can be emphasized by using the smiley character E21 and the smiley pattern E23, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode change effect is executed after the second character appearance effect in the character appearance effect. According to this configuration, the number of smiley characters E21 increases, thereby increasing the degree of expectation for the mode change, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the character appearance effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects A to C, the smiling character E21 appears while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. It is not limited. For example, the configuration may be such that the smiley character E21 appears while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A to C, the mode change effect is executed after the second character appearance effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the second character appearance effect, a chance-up effect, a look-ahead effect, a big-win suggestion effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a big-win notification effect, a ready-to-win announcement effect, etc. may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects A to C, an accessory movement effect may be performed in which the second movable accessory 15, which is the same character as the smiley character E21, is moved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect in which a first character effect in which a predetermined character appears is performed,
The second display effect is a effect in which a second character effect is performed in which more of the predetermined characters appear than in the first character effect,
The third display effect is a effect for performing a predetermined effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second display effect includes an effect in which the predetermined character moves toward a predetermined position on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is a effect in which the predetermined character completely covers a predetermined area of the display means;
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of changing the decorative pattern,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed while the fifth display effect is being performed,
A part of the decorative pattern and a part of the predetermined character have the same shape,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a mode change effect that changes the mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

101 to 103, the holding consecutive suggestion effect will be described below. This holding consecutive suggesting effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Holding group suggestion production A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the holding consecutive suggestion effect A. FIG.
First, in the holding consecutive suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 101(A), the first specific holding effect is executed. This first specific hold effect is an effect for predicting whether the target hold is a jackpot or not, with the first specific hold as a target, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 . For example, the first specific reservation effect is determined whether the first reservation is a jackpot or not, with the first reservation being the first specific reservation. In addition, this first specific reservation effect predicts whether the first reservation or the second reservation is a jackpot or not, for example, with the first reservation and the second reservation as the first specific reservation.

For example, if there are four holds, the oldest hold becomes the first hold, the next oldest hold becomes the second hold, the next oldest hold becomes the third hold, and the newest hold becomes the fourth hold. . This also applies to the following.

When there is a jackpot in the first specific hold, after the first specific hold effect, the process shifts to a hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 101(B). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the first specific suspension, after the first specific suspension effect, a transition is made to the suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 101(C).

After the first specific suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a suspension consecutive success effect can be executed. When the player presses the effect button 63, this hold consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 suggesting that the first specific hold is a big win at the place where the button image E31 was, and A character image E32 is displayed below the light image E33, suggesting that there is a big win in the first specific hold. The light image E33 is an image representing a shining state, and the character image E32 is an image representing characters of "success".

After the first specific suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this suspension consecutive failure performance, even if the player presses the performance button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image suggests that there is no big win in the first specific suspension. Display E34. The character image E34 is an image representing characters of "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), the second specific holding effect is executed. This second specific reservation performance is a performance for predicting whether the target reservation is a big hit or not, targeting a second specific reservation different from the first specific reservation, and a button image E31 is shown. For example, this second specific reservation performance predicts whether the third reservation is a big hit or not, with the third reservation being the second specific reservation. In addition, this second specific reservation effect predicts whether the third reservation or the fourth reservation is a big hit or not, for example, with the third reservation and the fourth reservation as the second specific reservation.

When there is a jackpot in the second specific hold, after the second specific hold effect, the process shifts to a hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 101(E). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the second specific suspension, after the second specific suspension effect, a transition is made to a suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 101(F).

After the second specific suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a suspension consecutive success effect can be executed. When the player presses the effect button 63, this hold consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 suggesting that the first specific hold is a big win at the place where the button image E31 was, and A character image E32 is displayed below the light image E33, suggesting that there is a big win in the first specific hold.

After the second specific suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 101(F), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this suspension consecutive failure performance, even if the player presses the performance button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image suggests that there is no big win in the first specific suspension. Display E34.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 101A to 101F are the same fluctuation effects.

[Holding group suggestion production B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the holding consecutive suggestion effect B. FIG. This holding series suggestion performance B is a production in the case where there are at least four holds.
First, in the holding series suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the first holding effect is executed. This first suspension performance is directed to the first suspension, and is a performance for predicting whether the target suspension is a big win or not, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 .

When there is a jackpot in the first hold, after the first hold effect, the process shifts to a hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 102(B). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the first suspension, after the first specific suspension effect, the process shifts to the suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 102(C).

After the first holding effect, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a holding succession success effect can be executed. In this hold consecutive success effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, a light image E33 is displayed at the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a big win in the first hold. A character image E32 is displayed below the image E33, suggesting that there is a big win in the first hold. The light image E33 is an image representing a shining state, and the character image E32 is an image representing characters of "success".

After the first suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this suspension consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image E34 suggests that there is no big win in the first hold. display. The character image E34 is an image representing characters of "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the second suspension effect is executed. This second suspension effect is an effect for predicting whether the second suspension is a big hit or not, and a button image E31 is shown.

When there is a jackpot in the second hold, after the second hold effect, the process shifts to the hold succession success effect shown in FIG. 102(E). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the second suspension, after the second suspension effect, the process shifts to the suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 102(F).

After the second holding effect, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a holding consecutive success effect can be executed. In this hold consecutive success effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, a light image E33 is displayed at the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a big win in the second hold, and a light image is displayed. Below the image E33, a character image E32 suggesting that there is a big win in the second reserve is displayed.

After the second suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this holding consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image E34 suggests that there is no big hit in the second hold. display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the third suspension effect is executed. This third suspension performance is directed to the third suspension, and is a performance for predicting whether the target suspension is a big win or not, and a button image E31 is shown.

When there is a big hit in the third hold, after the third hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 102(H). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the third suspension, after the third suspension effect, the process shifts to the suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 102(I).

After the third holding effect, as shown in FIG. 102(H), a holding succession success effect can be executed. In this hold consecutive success effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, a light image E33 is displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a big hit in the third hold, and a light image is displayed. A character image E32 is displayed below the image E33, suggesting that there is a big win in the third hold.

After the third suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 102(I), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this suspension consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image E34 suggests that there is no big hit in the third hold. display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(J), the fourth suspension effect is executed. This fourth suspension effect is an effect for predicting whether the target suspension is a big win or not with the fourth suspension as the object, and a button image E31 is shown.

When there is a jackpot in the fourth hold, after the fourth hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 102(K). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the fourth suspension, after the fourth suspension effect, the process shifts to the suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 102(L).

After the fourth holding effect, as shown in FIG. 102(K), a holding succession success effect can be executed. In this hold consecutive success effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, a light image E33 is displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, suggesting that there is a big win in the fourth hold. Below the image E33, a character image E32 suggesting that there is a big win in the fourth reserve is displayed.

After the fourth suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 102(L), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this holding consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image E34 suggests that there is no jackpot in the fourth hold. display.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 102A to 102L are effects of the same variation.

[Holding group suggestion production C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the holding consecutive suggestion effect C. FIG.
First, in the holding consecutive suggestion effect C, the holding effect is executed as shown in FIG. 103(A). This suspension effect is a performance for predicting whether the suspension is a big win or not with respect to the suspension, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 .

When the hold is a jackpot, after the hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 103(B). On the other hand, when the suspension is not a jackpot, after the suspension effect, the process shifts to the suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 103(C).

After the suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the suspension consecutive success effect can be executed. When the performance button 63 is pressed by the player, this hold consecutive success effect suggests that the hold is a big win (indicates that the change will result in a big win) at the place where the button image E31 was. An optical image E33 is displayed, and a character image E32 is displayed below the optical image E33, suggesting that the hold is a big win (indicating that the variation will result in a big win). The light image E33 is an image representing a shining state, and the character image E32 is an image representing characters of "success".

After the suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this suspension consecutive failure performance, even if the player presses the performance button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image suggests that there is no big win in the first specific suspension. Display E34. The character image E34 is an image representing characters of "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the first specific pending effect is executed. This first specific hold effect is an effect for predicting whether the target hold is a jackpot or not, with the first specific hold as a target, and a button image E31 is shown. For example, the first specific reservation effect is determined whether the first reservation is a jackpot or not, with the first reservation being the first specific reservation. In addition, this first specific reservation effect predicts whether the first reservation or the second reservation is a jackpot or not, for example, with the first reservation and the second reservation as the first specific reservation.

When there is a jackpot in the first specific hold, after the first specific hold effect, the process shifts to a hold succession success effect shown in FIG. 103(E). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the first specific suspension, after the first specific suspension effect, the process shifts to a suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 103(F).

After the first specific suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a suspension consecutive success effect can be executed. When the player presses the effect button 63, this hold consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 suggesting that the first specific hold is a big win at the place where the button image E31 was, and A character image E32 is displayed below the light image E33, suggesting that there is a big win in the first specific hold.

After the first specific suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this suspension consecutive failure performance, even if the player presses the performance button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image suggests that there is no big win in the first specific suspension. Display E34.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the second specific holding effect is executed. This second specific reservation performance is a performance for predicting whether the target reservation is a big hit or not, targeting a second specific reservation different from the first specific reservation, and a button image E31 is shown. For example, this second specific reservation performance predicts whether the third reservation is a big hit or not, with the third reservation being the second specific reservation. In addition, this second specific reservation effect predicts whether the third reservation or the fourth reservation is a big hit or not, for example, with the third reservation and the fourth reservation as the second specific reservation.

When there is a jackpot in the second specific hold, after the second specific hold effect, the process shifts to a hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 103(H). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot in the second specific suspension, after the second specific suspension effect, a transition is made to the suspension consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 103(I).

After the second specific holding effect, as shown in FIG. 103(H), a holding succession success effect can be executed. When the player presses the effect button 63, this hold consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 suggesting that the first specific hold is a big win at the place where the button image E31 was, and A character image E32 is displayed below the light image E33, suggesting that there is a big win in the first specific hold.

After the second specific suspension effect, as shown in FIG. 103(I), a suspension consecutive failure effect can be executed. In this suspension consecutive failure performance, even if the player presses the performance button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image suggests that there is no big win in the first specific suspension. Display E34.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 103A to 103I are effects of the same variation.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the holding series suggestion effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the holding streak suggesting effects A and C, after the first specific holding effect, the holding streak success or the holding streak failure, the second specific holding streak effect, the holding streak success or the holding streak failure is executed. be. In addition, in the holding series suggestion performance B, after the first holding production, the holding series success or the holding series failure, the second holding production, the holding series success or the holding series failure is executed. According to this configuration, since it is possible to suggest two or more holding trains, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the holding consecutive suggestion effect is executed in the same variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a plurality of holding trains with one change, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in addition to a plurality of holding consecutive suggestions in the holding consecutive suggestion effect C, if the variation results in a big win, an effect suggesting that the change is a big win is executed. ing. According to this configuration, in addition to the notification of a plurality of holding trains, it is possible to notify the big win of the change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the holding consecutive suggestion effect is performed within a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, when the reverberation after a big win is strong, it is possible to suggest a series of holdings, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the holding consecutive suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the jackpot game can be made more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the holding consecutive suggestion effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the holding continuation suggesting effects A to C are the same fluctuation effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and part of the holding continuation suggesting effects are performed by future fluctuation. You may do so. For example, in the holding consecutive suggestion effect A, FIGS. 101(A)-(C) may be performed with the relevant variation, and FIGS. 101(D)-(F) may be performed with the next variation.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the holding consecutive suggestion effects A to C may be performed within a predetermined number of times after the big winning game. Further, the holding consecutive suggestion effects A to C may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the holding consecutive suggestion effect B is an example of the effect in the case where there are four holds. 103 (A) to (F) may be performed if there are two pending, or if there is one pending, FIG. 103 (A) to (C) ) may be performed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect for performing a first holding consecutive suggestion effect suggesting whether or not there is a jackpot in the first holding,
The second display effect is an effect for performing a second hold consecutive suggestion effect to suggest whether or not there is a big win in a second hold different from the first hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The combination effect is performed in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is, in the case of a big win in the variation, a performance of performing the variation jackpot suggesting effect suggesting that the variation is a big win,
The combination effect includes the fifth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The first holding suggestion effect or the second holding suggestion effect is performed within a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The first holding suggestion effect or the second holding suggestion effect is performed during a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The area display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. FIG. This area display effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Area display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the area display effect A. FIG.
First, in the area display effect A, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to fluctuate, and the reserved display area C41 is displayed. A reserved image 9A and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the reserved display area C41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), the second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed on the right periphery of the display screen 7a. In this second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is the same as in the first area display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), the second area moving effect is executed. This second area moving effect is an effect in which the second area E42 moves upward. Specifically, the second area E42 moves based on the reserved display area C41. Note that the second area E42 is not limited to this, and other reference positions (for example, the second reserved icon 9C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, corners of the display screen 7a, reference points appearing on the display screen 7a) You can move to standard. In this second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is the same as in the first area display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up display is performed in the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as “extra hot”, suggesting that expectations for a big win are high.

[Area display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining area display effect B. FIG.
First, in the area display effect B, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to fluctuate, and the reserved display area C41 is displayed. A reserved image 9A and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the reserved display area C41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed on the right periphery of the display screen 7a. Also, in this second area display effect, the first area E41 is reduced more than in the first area display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), the second area moving effect is executed. This second region moving effect is a effect in which the second region E42 moves upward while expanding. Specifically, the second area E42 moves based on the reserved display area C41. Note that the second area E42 is not limited to this, and other reference positions (for example, the second reserved icon 9C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, corners of the display screen 7a, reference points appearing on the display screen 7a) You can move to the standard. In this second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is reduced more than in the second area display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up display is performed in the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as “extra hot”, suggesting that expectations for a big win are high. In this chance-up effect, the first area E41 is dead.

[Area display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the area display effect C. FIG.
First, in the area display effect C, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start to fluctuate, and the reserved display area C41 is displayed. A reserved image 9A and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the reserved display area C41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed on the right periphery of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this second area display effect, the first area E41 rotates counterclockwise about the reserved display area C41 as a rotation axis, and part of it disappears from the display screen 7a. is smaller than

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), the second area moving effect is executed. In this second area movement effect, the second area E42 rotates counterclockwise about the reserved display area C41 as a rotation axis to expand the area of the second area E42. In this second area display effect, the first area E41 rotates counterclockwise about the reserved display area C41 as a rotation axis, and part of it disappears from the display screen 7a. reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up display is performed in the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as “extra hot”, suggesting that expectations for a big win are high. In this chance-up effect, the first area E41 is dead.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the area display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effect, the first area display effect is performed, then the second area display effect is performed, then the second area movement effect is performed, and then the chance up effect is performed. It has become. According to this configuration, a predetermined sense of anticipation can be imparted by the change of the area, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect of displaying the second area E42, the second area moving effect of enlarging the second area E42 is executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the second area E42, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect of displaying the second area E42, the second area moving effect of shrinking the first area E41 is executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the second area E42, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect of displaying the second area E42, the second area moving effect of reducing the first area E41 is executed. A chance-up effect is executed in which the 1 area E41 is extinguished. According to this configuration, the second area E42 can be emphasized, that is, the effect using the second area E42 can be emphasized. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the second area E42 is moved in the area display effect C, the second area E42 is rotationally moved around the reserved display area C41 as a rotation axis. According to this configuration, the movement of the second area E42 can be dynamically performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the area display rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects A to C, after the second area moving effect, the second area E42 is used to perform the chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, after the second area moving effect, the second area E42 may be used to perform various effects such as a mode suggesting effect, a look-ahead effect, a jackpot suggesting effect, a ready-to-win advance notice effect, and a pending change suggesting effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect for displaying a first area on the display screen of the display means,
The second display effect is a effect for displaying a second area on the display screen of the display means,
The third display effect is a effect of moving the second area with respect to a certain reference,
The fourth display effect is a effect for performing a predetermined effect in the second area,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed. It is carried out,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect for enlarging the second area,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect for performing an effect of shrinking the first area,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E4-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect 3,
A seventh display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The seventh display effect is a effect for performing an effect of extinguishing the first area,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the seventh display effect,
In the combination effect, the seventh display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The third display effect is a effect of rotating and moving the second area about a reference axis.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The time saving mode effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. This time-saving mode effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Time saving mode production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the time saving mode effect A. FIG. This time-saving mode production A represents the production at the time of deviation for two fluctuations. When the game state is the time-saving state, such an effect at the time of loss is continuously performed.

First, in the time saving mode production A, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable production is executed. This variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a losing pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This losing pattern arrangement stop effect is a performance of stopping the losing pattern arrangement representing a loss using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 107(B), 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, and 6 patterns are used for the decorative patterns 8C and 8R as the missing pattern array.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a losing pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This losing pattern arrangement stop effect is a performance of stopping the losing pattern arrangement representing a loss using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 107(D), 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, and 6 patterns are used for the decorative patterns 8C and 8R as the missing pattern array.

In this way, in the time saving mode effect A, after the fluctuation is started, the shift notification is performed in a relatively short time without inserting a time-consuming effect such as a ready-to-win effect.

[Time saving mode production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the time saving mode effect B. FIG. This time-saving mode effect B is an effect performed when the game state is the time-saving state, and represents a change effect of a big win after the effect of losing by one change.

First, in the time saving mode production B, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the variable production is executed. This variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), a losing pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This losing pattern arrangement stop effect is a performance of stopping the losing pattern arrangement representing a loss using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 108(B), 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, and 6 patterns are used for the decorative patterns 8C and 8R as the missing pattern array.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern arrangement stop production is a production to stop the jackpot pattern arrangement representing the jackpot by using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 108(D), as the jackpot pattern array, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form 7 patterns of grids.

Thus, in the time saving mode performance B, even if it is a variation in the case of a big win, the big win is reported in a relatively short time after the start of the variation without inserting a time-consuming performance such as a ready-to-win performance.

[Normal mode effect]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the normal mode effect. This normal mode effect is a effect that is performed when the game state is the normal state, and represents the effect at the time of loss for one variation.

First, in the normal mode production, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the variable production is executed. This variation effect is a effect of varying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, making various characters appear, and performing various displays.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this Lee effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form a ready-to-win state, and the ally character CRA performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), a losing pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This losing pattern arrangement stop effect is a performance of stopping the losing pattern arrangement representing a loss using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 109(C), 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, and 6 patterns are used for the decorative patterns 8C and 8R as the missing pattern array.

In addition, when the game state is the normal state, when a big win is achieved, a big win notification is performed via a ready-to-win effect. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, in the case of losing, relatively short effects such as those shown in FIGS. 107(A) and (B) and FIGS.

When the game state is the time saving state (during time saving), the time saving mode production A in Figs. 107(A), (B) and Figs. That is, in the variation in the case of losing in the time saving state (loss variation), the effect using time, for example, the ready-to-win effect is not executed, so the variation time is relatively short. On the other hand, in the loss variation when the game state is the normal state, as shown in the normal mode presentation in FIG. 109, a relatively long presentation such as a ready-to-win presentation may be performed, and the variation time is relatively long.
In addition, in the fluctuation (jackpot fluctuation) in the case of a big hit in the time saving state, the production that uses time, for example, the ready-to-win production is not executed, so the fluctuation time is relatively short. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, the big hit variation may involve a relatively long effect such as a ready-to-win effect, and the variation time is relatively long.

In other words, the average fluctuation time is relatively short in the deviation fluctuation of the time saving state. On the other hand, the average fluctuation time is relatively long in the deviation fluctuation of the normal state.
In addition, the average fluctuation time is relatively short in the jackpot fluctuation in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the normal state jackpot fluctuation, the average fluctuation time is relatively long.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the time saving mode production and the normal mode production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the time-saving mode effect, in the case of a loss, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is removed without going through the ready-to-win state. In the mode production, in the case of losing, after the start of variation of the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns are stopped via the ready-to-win state and displayed in the pattern arrangement. According to this configuration, in the time-saving mode production, high-speed digestion becomes possible, and the next big win can be obtained quickly. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the time-saving mode production continues the deviation fluctuation production of FIGS. 107 (A), (B) and FIGS. (See Modification 1 described later). According to this configuration, high-speed digestion is possible up to a predetermined number of fluctuations after the big win, and the next big win can be obtained quickly. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the time saving mode production continues to perform the deviation fluctuation production of Figs. 107 (A), (B) and Figs. . According to this configuration, high-speed digestion is possible until a big win is made, and the next big win can be obtained quickly. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the normal mode effect includes, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the effect of removing the decorative symbols via the ready-to-win state and stopping and displaying them in the pattern arrangement, and after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the ready-to-win state is displayed. One of a plurality of performances including a performance of stopping and displaying the pattern array without passing through the decorative patterns is performed. According to this configuration, in the normal mode effect, it is possible to provide an effect that can be enjoyed by the player who has a pause, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the time saving mode production is shorter than the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the normal mode production. According to this configuration, in the time-saving mode production, high-speed digestion becomes possible, and the next big win can be obtained quickly. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of time saving mode production and normal mode production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the game state is the time saving state (during time saving), the time saving mode production A of FIGS. 107 (A), (B) and FIGS. Although it is configured to continuously perform the losing variation effect, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game state is a time saving state (during time saving), unless the jackpot is hit, up to a predetermined number of fluctuations after the jackpot, FIGS. 107 (A), (B) and FIGS. The production may be continued.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect for performing a first mode effect that enters after the first jackpot,
The second display effect is a effect for performing a second mode effect that enters after a second jackpot different from the first jackpot,
In the first mode effect, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the losing pattern is fixed and stopped without going through the ready-to-win state.
In the second mode production, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, a reach fluctuation production is performed in which the losing pattern is fixed and stopped via the reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the first mode production, the loss fluctuation production is continued until a predetermined number of fluctuations after the first jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the first mode production, the loss variation production is continued until the next big win after the first big win.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the second mode production, one production out of a plurality of variable productions including the reach fluctuation production and the loss fluctuation production is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
In the first mode production, the fluctuation time in the big hit fluctuation is shorter than the fluctuation time in the reach fluctuation production.
A gaming machine characterized by:

110 to 112, description will be given of the non-holding-continue effect, the holding-continue effect, and the revival effect. These effects are, for example, fluctuations after a predetermined number of rotations after the jackpot game during time saving, the last fluctuation of the time saving state, the first fluctuation after the jackpot game, or the last fluctuation of the probability variable state. obtain.

[Direction without holding group]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the non-holding rendition effect.
First, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the variable start effect is executed in the non-holding ream effect. This variation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, a suggestive effect that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot is performed (see FIG. 101(A), etc. described above). Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the non-holding ream suggestion effect is executed. A button image E61 and a character image E62A are displayed in this non-holding ream suggestion effect. The button image E61 is an image that does not include an optical image E64, which will be described later, and is an image that suggests that there is no jackpot in the hold. In addition, the character image E62A is also an image suggesting that there is no jackpot in the hold, and is an image representing the characters "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), a result effect is executed. In this result effect, a result image E63 is displayed. This result image E63 is an image suggesting that the time saving state ends, and represents the number of times of RUSH (the number of times of consecutive games) and the number of balls obtained during RUSH (during time saving, during consecutive games).
When this performance without holding ream ends, the time saving state (RUSH) ends.
Note that FIGS. 110A, 110B, and 110C are effects of the same variation.

[Performance with hold group]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining an effect with a holding run.
First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the variable start effect is executed in the effect with the holding string. This variation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, a suggestive effect that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot is performed (see FIG. 101(A), etc. described above). Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), an effect suggesting that there is a holding line is executed. A button image E61, a character image E62B, and a light image E64 are displayed in this holding streak suggestion effect. The light image E64 is an image showing a state of shining, and is an image suggesting that there is a big win in the reserve. In addition, the character image E62B is also an image suggesting that there is no jackpot in the hold, and is an image representing the characters "success".

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), a jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern arrangement stop production is a production to stop the jackpot pattern arrangement representing the jackpot by using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 111(C), as the jackpot pattern array, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form 7-pattern grids.

111(A) and (B) show the effect of the change, and FIG. 111(C) shows the effect of the change after that, which is the big win in the pending state.
When the performance with the holding tandem ends, a jackpot game is started, and then the time saving state (RUSH) continues.

[Resurrection production]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the resurrection effect.
First, in the resurrection effect, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a variable start effect is executed. This variation start effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, a suggestive effect that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot is performed (see FIG. 101(A), etc. described above). Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), the non-reserving replay suggestion effect is executed. A button image E61 and a character image E62A are displayed in this non-holding ream suggestion effect. The button image E61 is an image that does not include an optical image E64, which will be described later, and is an image that suggests that there is no jackpot in the hold. In addition, the character image E62A is also an image suggesting that there is no jackpot in the hold, and is an image representing the characters "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a result effect is executed. In this result effect, a result image E63 is displayed. This result image E63 is an image suggesting that the time saving state ends, and represents the number of times of RUSH (the number of times of consecutive games) and the number of balls obtained during RUSH (during time saving, during consecutive games).

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), a character movable effect is executed. This movable accessory effect is an effect in which a display indicating that there is a big win in the reserve is performed, and the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the second state (see FIG. 48). As a display suggesting that there is a jackpot in the reserve, the special pattern is stopped in the decorative pattern 8C in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the in-hold jackpot suggesting image E65 is displayed. This on-hold jackpot suggestive image E65 is described as "I'm coming". In this accessory movable production, a lamp production is performed using the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66. - 特許庁These effects can suggest that there is a jackpot in the hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), a jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern arrangement stop production is a production to stop the jackpot pattern arrangement representing the jackpot by using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 112(E), as the jackpot pattern array, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form 7 patterns.
When this resurrection effect is completed, a jackpot game is performed, and then the time saving state (RUSH) continues.

FIG. 112(A) to (D) show the effect of the variation, and FIG. 112(E) shows the effect of the variation after that, which is a jackpot in the reserve.
When the performance with the holding tandem ends, a jackpot game is started, and then the time saving state (RUSH) continues.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of the non-holding continuation effect, the holding continuation effect, and the resurrection effect are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the resurrection effect, a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not there is a pending jackpot is performed. movable effect) is executed. According to this configuration, although the player is disappointed by the result presentation, the player is then able to obtain great pleasure from the execution of the movable character presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the resurrection effect, the effect of moving the second movable accessory 15 is executed while the display suggesting that there is a big win in the hold. According to this configuration, by moving the second movable accessory 15, it is possible to emphasize the suggestion that there is a big win in the hold, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the ramp effect is executed using the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 during the resurrection effect, when the display suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the suggestion that a big win is possible in the hold by means of the lamp effect, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the resurrection effect, after a display suggesting that there is a big win in the pending state, the big win symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the big win soon after recognizing the reserved group, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the resurrection effect, when forming the jackpot pattern arrangement in the jackpot pattern arrangement stop production, a special pattern is used for at least one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Form an array (see variant 2 above). According to this configuration, the player can obtain the holding group after the resurrection after the result effect, so that the player can obtain great pleasure and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the non-holding continuation effect, the holding continuation effect, and the resurrection effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the jackpot games are shown in FIGS. You can run it during

[Modification 2]
In the resurrection production of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot pattern arrangement stop production shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a big win in the reservation, a special pattern may be used for at least one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R to form a big win pattern array.

[Modification 3]
110(C) or 112(C), the color of the result image E63 is changed, You may make it suggest the continuation expectation degree (below, it is also called a revival expectation degree) of a time saving state (RUSH) by making a predetermined|prescribed character appear. For example, in the result rendering of FIG. 110(C), the probability of setting the color of the result image E63 to blue, which has a low expectation of recovery, is set high, and in the result rendering of FIG. By setting a high probability of red with a high degree of color, the player can recognize that the degree of recovery expectation is low if the result image E63 is blue when it appears, and that if the color is red, can recognize that there is a high degree of expectation for revival.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect that performs a suggestive effect suggesting the presence or absence of a pending jackpot,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a result image when it is suggested in the suggestive effect that there is no pending jackpot,
The third display effect is a effect of displaying an image suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect for performing a character effect that moves the character,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of performing a lamp effect using a decorative lamp,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect of displaying a jackpot pattern array using decorative patterns,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4,
The jackpot pattern array using the decorative pattern includes a specific pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The countdown variation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. This countdown variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the countdown variable effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is a display effect to be displayed on.

[Countdown variation effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect A. FIG. In the countdown variation effect A, first, the countdown display of FIG. 92(A) is executed. Specifically, first, the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Numerical image IN1 is a numerical value of a specific value, which is represented here in Roman letters. Although the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters here, it may be written in other ways. Also, here, 4 is shown as the numerical value, but this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward direction variation effect shown in FIG. 92(B) is executed. Specifically, after displaying the numerical image IN1, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward and start moving in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C has already been variably displayed.

Next, the effect before stopping the right decorative symbol shown in FIG. 92(C) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed and the middle decorative design 8C is being variably displayed, the movement of the right decorative design 8R slows down. Then, after decelerating to such an extent that the player thinks that the right decorative symbol 8R of the same numerical value (here, "6") as the number (here, "6") stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol 8L will be stopped and displayed, FIG. The right decorative symbol slide stop display shown in is executed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R having the same numeric value (here, "6") stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L is not stop-displayed, and the next numeric value (here, "5") is stopped-displayed. be done.

Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 92(E) is executed. Specifically, the display screen 7a displays a numerical image IN2 having numerical values decremented (subtracted) by one from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 92(A). Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image representing 3, and is written in romaji like the numerical image IN1.

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 92(F) is executed. Specifically, after displaying the numerical image IN2, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move upward and start to move in opposite directions appearing from below the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C has already been variably displayed.

Next, the effect before stopping the left and right decorative symbols shown in FIG. 92(G) is executed. Specifically, while the middle decorative pattern 8C is being variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in parallel. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same numerical value (here, "6"). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed, so that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 92(H) is executed.

[Countdown variation effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect B. FIG. The countdown variation effect B differs from the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92 in the aspect of the numerical image IN1. In the countdown display of FIG. 93(A), a numerical image IN1 surrounded by a frame is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, 1 is shown as the numerical value, but this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward direction variation effect shown in FIG. 93(B) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each move downward and start moving in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a.

93(C), and the right decorative symbol slide stop display of FIG. 93(D) are different from the countdown variation effect A of FIG. It is the same.

Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 93(E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical image IN2 whose numerical value is decremented (subtracted) by one from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 93A is displayed surrounded by a frame on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image representing 0 (zero).

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 93(F) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each move upward and start moving in the opposite direction appearing from below the display screen 7a.

The effect before the left and right decorative symbols stop in FIG. 93(G) and the ready-to-win effect in FIG. 93(H) are the same as the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 92 except that the display of the numerical image IN2 is continued.

[Countdown variation effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect C. FIG. Countdown change effect C is compared with countdown change effect A of FIG. 92, and countdown change effect B is compared with countdown change effect A of FIG. The difference is that In the countdown display of FIG. 94A, a translucent numerical image IN1 and a specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters, but may be written in other ways. The numeric value can be any value. The specific image IMC is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smile. In addition, a specific object means everything that can be recognized as an independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. are also included. The specific image IMC is displayed overlapping the translucent numerical image IN1. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward direction variation effect shown in FIG. 94(B) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward and appear from above the display screen 7a in the forward direction. to start changing.

The effect before stopping the right decorative design in FIG. 94(C) and the right decorative design sliding stop display in FIG. 94(D) are the countdown of FIG. It is the same as the variable production A.

Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 94(E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical image IN2 having numerical values decremented (subtracted) by one from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 94A and a specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. . Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image representing 3 in Roman letters, and is displayed translucent like the numerical image IN1. The specific image IMC is displayed overlapping the translucent numerical image IN2.

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 94(F) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move upward and appear from below the display screen 7a in the opposite direction. to start changing.

94(G) left and right decorative pattern stop before production and FIG. 94(H) ready-to-win production are similar to the countdown fluctuation production A of FIG. It is the same.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the countdown variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, a first effect in which the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. A second effect in which is variably displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the second effect, the third effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed, and after the third effect , and a fourth effect in which a numerical image IN2 decremented by one from the numerical image IN2 displayed in the first effect is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the fourth effect, reverse variation display is performed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the direction opposite to the variation display. A fifth effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, the ready-to-win effect by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not executed in the third effect, and after the fifth effect, the decorative symbol 8L is executed. , 8C and 8R execute the ready-to-win effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the fifth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move upward from downward. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the above-described countdown variation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the countdown display, the forward direction fluctuation effect is started. However, after the countdown display, other effects may be executed before the forward fluctuation effect. For example, a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped may be displayed. The same applies between the countdown display and the reverse direction variation effect. Also, the countdown variable effect may include a part of each effect shown in FIGS. 92-94. For example, the countdown variation effect may not include the right decorative symbol slide stop effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the forward-direction variation effect is such that the decorative symbols move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. However, the forward direction fluctuation effect may be a change mode effect other than this. For example, the forward direction variation effect may be an effect in which the decorative pattern moves from left to right on the display screen 7a. The same applies to the reverse direction variation effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above countdown variation effect, the countdown display was performed twice (for example, FIG. 92(A) and FIG. 92(E)). However, the number of countdown displays can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the countdown variable effect A, FIGS. 92(A) to 92(D) may be repeated multiple times, and then FIGS. 92(E) to 92(H) may be executed. At this time, the numerical image IN1 is sequentially decremented by one.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D10-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a numerical image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the numerical image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇Aspect D10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-1,
a third effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the second effect;
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which a numerical image decremented by one from the numerical image displayed in the first effect is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇Aspect D10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-2,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which a reverse variable display is performed in which the decorative pattern moves in a direction opposite to the variable display,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-3,
In the third production, the reach production by the decorative pattern is not executed,
After the fifth effect, a reach effect is executed by the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇Aspect D10-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-3 or aspect D10-4,
In the fifth effect, the decorative pattern moves upward from the downward direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation section image superimposition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. FIG. This operation section image superimposition effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation unit image superimposition effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image superimposition effect A. FIG. In the operation unit image superimposition effect A, first, the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 95(A) is executed. Specifically, first, an operation section image BI1, a first specific image IC1, and a character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation unit image BI1 is an image representing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and represents the appearance of the effect button 63 here. It should be noted that the operation unit image BI1 may represent the appearance of operation means other than the effect button 63 as long as the operation means is included in the game machine 1 . The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smile. In addition, a specific object means everything that can be recognized as an independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. are also included. The operation section image BI1 is displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the first specific image IC1. The character image IW1 represents characters related to the operation method of the operation unit image BI1. Here, "Press!" is displayed as characters related to the operation method of the effect button 63 represented by the operation portion image BI1. When the operation portion image BI1 represents the effect button 63, the character image related to the operation method can also be exemplified by "continuous hits" and "PUSH". The character image IW1 is displayed overlapping the first specific image IC1.

Next, the specific image corresponding moving effect shown in FIG. 95(B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation portion image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. This is because the operation direction of the effect button 63 represented by the operation portion image BI1 is the vertical direction. For example, when the first specific image IC1 represents the steering wheel 60, the first specific image IC1 rotates left and right.

Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95(C) is executed. Specifically, the second specific image IC2 is displayed instead of the first specific image IC1. The second specific image IC2 is an image representing the same specific object as the first specific image IC1, and is larger in size than the first specific image IC1. That is, in the specific image enlarging effect, an effect is performed in which an image representing a specific object (here, a smile) is enlarged by switching from the first specific image IC1 to the second specific image IC2. As with the first specific image IC1, a portion of the lower side of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation section image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed and is displayed overlapping the second specific image IC2.

Next, the specific image corresponding moving effect shown in FIG. 95(D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first specific image IC1, the second specific image IC2 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation section image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95D, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction.

Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95(E) is executed. Specifically, the third specific image IC3 is displayed instead of the second specific image IC2. The third specific image IC3 is an image representing the same specific object as the second specific image IC2, and is larger in size than the second specific image IC2. 95(C) and 95(E), the first specific image IC1 is switched to the second specific image IC2, and furthermore, the second specific image IC1 is switched to the third specific image IC2. As a result, an effect is produced in which an image representing a specific object (here, a smile) gradually becomes larger. Similar to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, a portion of the lower side of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation section image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed, and is displayed overlapping the third specific image IC3.

Next, the specific image corresponding moving effect shown in FIG. 95(F) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, the third specific image IC3 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation portion image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95F, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction. An effect of switching to the vibrating third specific image IC3 is performed.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining operation unit image superimposition effect B. FIG. Operation unit image superimposition effect B differs from operation unit image superimposition effect A in FIG. 95 in the mode of change of the specific image. In the specific image/operation section image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 96A, a first operation section image BI1, a first specific image IC1, and a first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Points other than the character contents of the first character image IW1 are the same as those of the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect of FIG. 95(A).

Next, the enlarging/corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96(B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 gradually enlarges and moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation section image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. This is because the operation direction of the effect button 63 represented by the first operation portion image BI1 is the vertical direction. Further, a gigantic/corresponding movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 96(C). Specifically, the first specific image IC1 further gradually enlarges and moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation section image BI1.

Next, the specific image/operation section image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 96(D) is executed. Specifically, a second operation section image AS1, a fourth specific image IC4, and a second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second operation unit image AS1 is an image representing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and here represents the appearance of the sword member 64 including the sword button 65. As shown in FIG. The fourth specific image IC4 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents a smile shape different from that of the first specific image IC1. The second operation section image AS1 is displayed so as to cover part of the fourth specific image IC4. The second character image IW2 represents characters related to the operation method of the second operation section image AS1. Here, "push!" is displayed as characters related to the operation method of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation portion image AS1. The second character image IW2 is displayed overlapping the fourth specific image IC4.

Next, the enlarging/corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96(E) is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 gradually enlarges and moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation section image AS1. Here, the fourth specific image IC4 moves vertically. This is because the operation direction of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation portion image AS1 is the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the enlarging/corresponding movement effect is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation section image AS1 while gradually increasing in size.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image superimposition effect C. FIG. In the operation portion image superimposition effect C, first, the specific image/operation portion image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 97A is executed. Specifically, an operation section image BI1, a specific image IC1, and a first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Except for the fact that the specific image IC1 does not move up and down, it is the same as the specific image/operation section image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 95(A).

Next, the specific image visibility difficulty rendering shown in FIG. 97(B) is executed. Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 63, the specific image IC1 explodes and disappears, making the specific image IC1 difficult to see. At this time, an operation portion image BI1 and a second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second character image IW2 is a character suggesting that an operation by the player has been detected, and is displayed here as "yay!". Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the operation section image visibility rendering effect is executed. Specifically, the operation section image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image IC1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the specific image change effect shown in FIG. 97(D) is executed. Specifically, the aspect of the specific image IC1 changes. A change in mode is, for example, a change in color or shape. Here, the color of the specific image IC1 changes from the first color to the second color. Note that the color change of the specific image IC1 may alternately repeat the first color and the second color.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image superimposition effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, when the first specific image IC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the operation unit image is displayed so as to cover at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. A first effect in which BI1 is displayed and a second effect in which a second specific image IC2 larger than the first specific image IC1 is displayed after the first effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, after the second effect, a third effect in which a third specific image IC3 larger than the second specific image IC2 is displayed can be executed. is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the second effect, at least part of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation section image BI1. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the third effect, at least part of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation portion image BI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, the first specific image IC1 moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating portion image BI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, an image related to the operating method of the operating portion image BI1 is displayed in at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the operation section image superimposition effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation portion image superimposition effect A of FIG. 95, the operation portion image BI1 covers at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. However, the operation section image BI1 may cover the entire first specific image IC1. Further, the operation section image BI1 covers part of each of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3. However, the operation section image BI1 does not have to cover at least one of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3.

[Modification 2]
The operation unit image superimposed effects A to C shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 are examples of a part, and a part of the series of effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 may not be provided. Also, other effects may be included between the series of effects shown in FIGS. For example, in the operation section image superimposition effect A of FIG. 95, the specific image enlarging effect is performed twice, but it may be performed once, or may be performed three times or more.

[Modification 3]
Operation section image superimposition effects A to C shown in FIGS. Alternatively, other images may be displayed as well. For example, in the operation unit image superimposition effect A of FIG. 95, the character image IW1 may not be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
an operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target;
a first effect in which the operation means image is displayed so as to cover at least a portion of the first specific image in a state where the first specific image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the second specific image larger than the first specific image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the third specific image larger than the second specific image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2,
In the second effect, at least part of the second specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the third effect, at least part of the third specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the first effect, the first specific image moves in a direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
In the first effect, an image related to the operation method of the operation means is displayed in at least part of the first specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, among the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 . In this case, the display effects described above may be executed by the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1... Game machine 3... Game area 7... Image display device 9A... First reservation icon 9B... First reservation icon 9C... Second reservation icon 15... Board movable body 20... First start port (first entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of holds,
The gaming machine selects one game state from a plurality of game states including an advantageous game state that is relatively advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player,
The display means is capable of displaying a pending icon representing the pending stored in the pending storage means and a variation icon different from the pending icon and corresponding to the variation,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects ,
The first display effect is an effect indicating whether or not there is a jackpot in the reserve corresponding to the reserve icon instead of the change, and it is once confirmed that there is no jackpot in the reserve corresponding to the reserve icon. It is a production that performs the first suggestive display that is collectively suggested by the display,
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and is different from the effect indicating whether or not there is a big win in the hold corresponding to the hold icon, and is not the change. It is an effect of performing a second suggestive display that collectively suggests that there is a jackpot in the hold corresponding to the hold icon in one display,
The first display effect and the second display effect are the same variation, a specific variation that does not result in a big win, and the game state is changed from the advantageous game state to the unfavorable game state. Performed when there is a jackpot in the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the last variation of the advantageous gaming state ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images